JP2022064396A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine of the present invention, a big winning game which is more advantageous to a player includes a first big winning game and a second big winning game that is more advantageous than the first big winning game. When a big winning is determined by first determination means based on the satisfaction of a first start condition, the game machine can execute either the first big winning game or the second big winning game A specific game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state includes a specific game state via the big winning game and the specific game state that does not go through the big winning game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game or a specific game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition.

Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes a special game based on the fact that the gaming medium passes through a specific area provided inside the winning device during the execution of the specific game (for example, Patent Document). See 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-057968

However, a gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in gaming is low.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state. A game state control means that can control a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the above is provided, and the determination means is used to establish a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first start condition and a second start condition. It has a second determination means for making a determination based on the above, and the special game includes a first special game and a second special game which is more advantageous than the first special game, and the first determination means. When it is determined that the special game is to be executed, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game state is controlled via the special game. It is characterized by having a specific gaming state to be played and a specific gaming state controlled without going through the special game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of a part of the front side of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific area detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for special time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the control data determination table. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the small hit game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table. It is a figure which shows the game state referred to at the end of a big hit game which does not go through a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the game state referred to at the end of a big hit game which goes through a small hit game. It is a mode flow which shows the transition of a game mode. It is a figure which shows the general electric control processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of various judgment tables used in the ordinary electric control processing. It is a figure which shows the external information data creation processing in a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating various signals output as game information. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after a setting change. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after the setting confirmation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear processing in the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of the 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of the 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of the 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a timing chart when a normal time saving game state occurs. It is a timing chart when the normal time saving game state ends. It is a timing chart from before the start to the end of the special time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the main processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission effect determination process at the time of a prize of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for the time saving final variation. It is a flowchart which shows the special time saving system effect processing of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the look-ahead effect is executed in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the variable effect is executed after shifting to the rush battle mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when it becomes a big hit in the fluctuation production of the last round of the rush battle mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the normal time saving game state ends. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 in the case of making a small hit by the remaining hold of the 2nd special symbol at the time of transition to a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 in the case of making a small hit by the remaining hold of the 2nd special symbol at the time of transition to a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the production example when the small hit game is executed in the super random dance mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the time saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small hit game in a random dance mode. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the special time saving system effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the production example when it becomes a customer waiting state when it shifts to the special time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the variation effect is executed after the transition to the special time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the countdown mode is executed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the effect example when the countdown mode is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the variation effect is executed after the transition to the special time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the production example when the special time saving game state ends. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing of the main control board in 2nd Embodiment.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which a game ball (game medium) flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95 described later are paid out based on the establishment of a grant condition. An upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as a game ball, and a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing a game ball that has flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper plate 11. A launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the upper part of the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become like. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the lighting is produced by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when an abnormality occurs in which the glass frame 4 is opened or the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIGS. 1 or 2) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. See) are provided side by side.

The effect button device 16 has an effect button 17 capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, and an effect button 17 in a normal state and a normal state. The effect button drive device 17b, which includes a button drive motor for changing to a protruding state located above, and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 into a normal state and a vibration state vibrating in a predetermined mode. Further, an effect button light emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 into a light-off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined mode is provided, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing operations such as selection operation, and a cross for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is lent out by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) juxtaposed to the game machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower plate 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the fullness detection switch 32a detects the fullness of the lower plate 12. During this period, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) including a 15a (see FIG. 5) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 5) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and a game board mounting frame 3. A lock mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in the closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The launching device 26 includes a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the launching member, and launching from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is opened. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launch device 26 to the upstream portion of the game region 5a is formed. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 for restricting the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and the game area 5a is launched by the first firing force by the decorative frame 40. It is divided into a left game area where the game ball is flowed down and a right game area where the game ball launched by the second launch force stronger than the first launch force flows down, and the left game area and the right game area. Is adapted to communicate below the decorative frame 40.

On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the left game area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the inside of the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced in the above can be rolled and flowed down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning openings 43 that allow game balls to always win (win) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, the game One general winning opening 43 is provided so that the ball can always win (win). When the game balls that have won (winned) in the general winning opening 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. It is paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, a first starting port 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) on which a game ball can always win (win) is provided, and the first starting port 45 wins (wins). When the game ball (ball) is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are dispensed by the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to determine whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

Immediately below the first starting port 45, a starting port lamp 75 that emits light in a predetermined manner when a lamp light emitting effect described later is executed is provided, and the gaming machine 1 covers the front of the starting port lamp 75. A lens member 75a (object) on which the "!! (double surprise mark)", which is an object of the model motif of the above, is formed is provided.

The model motif object may be provided directly on the front side of the first starting port 45, or may be provided independently in the vicinity of the first starting port 45 and the starting port lamp 75. In this way, by providing the object of the model motif at the position corresponding to the first starting port 45 where the line of sight of the player can easily gather, it becomes possible to easily impress the model of the game machine 1 on the player. ..

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the lower right of the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning in the collision detection described later). A variable starting portion 46 is provided that can convert a game ball from a difficult closed state to a winning state or an easy open state.

The variable starting portion 46 has a second starting port opening / closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction and a second starting port opening / closing member 48, while the upper surface of the variable starting portion 46 is inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to become a flow path for the game ball. A second starting port 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward just below the starting opening opening / closing member 48, and a second game ball that has won (winned) in the second starting opening 47. By moving the start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second start port opening / closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second start port 47 is converted to the closed state and the second start port is closed. A second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) for converting the second starting opening 47 into an open state by moving the opening / closing member 48 toward the rear (winning allowable position) is provided.

Then, a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 which is opened during the auxiliary game described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (granting condition is satisfied). Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to determine whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

In the right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, the upstream flow path 91a into which all the game balls launched toward the right game area flow in, and almost all the game balls outflowing from the upstream flow path 91a flow in. Central flow path 91b, left side flow path 91c into which the game ball bounced to the left without flowing into the central flow path 91b, and right side into which the game ball bounced to the right without flowing into the central flow path 91b flows in. The first downstream flow path 91e into which almost all of the flow path 91d, the game ball flowing out from the central flow path 91b, and the game ball flowing out from the right side flow path 91d flow in, and the left side without flowing into the first downstream flow path 91e. A second downstream flow path 91f into which the game ball bounced on the left side flow path 91c and the game ball flowing out from the left side flow path 91c flows in is provided.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, a normal figure gate 44 (normal figure start area) through which a game ball can always pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the normal figure gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a. If so, the prize ball is not given, but the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (hit judgment) as to whether or not to execute the hit game is given (the general map judgment information described later is stored).

In the middle of the central flow path 91b, it is possible or easy to open a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (it was determined to be a big hit by the big hit judgment). A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by tilting the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). The first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and the first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward just below the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51. By moving the first large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the first large winning opening 50 and the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the front (winning restriction position). To convert the first large winning opening 50 to the closed state and to convert the first large winning opening 50 to the open state by moving the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the rear (winning allowable position). The first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

Then, when the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 moves backward and the first large winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the small hit game described later, the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 A game ball that has flowed down the upper surface or a game ball that has reached the first large winning opening 50 wins a prize in the first large winning opening 50, and this game ball is detected by the first large winning opening detection switch 50a. A predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls.

Further, downstream of the first large winning opening detection switch 50a, the upper surface is inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for the game ball, and a specific area that can be moved in the front-rear direction is opened and closed. A member 52, a specific area 53 that opens upward just below the specific area opening / closing member 52, and a specific area detection switch 53a (see FIG. 5) that detects a game ball that has flowed into (entered) the specific area 53. The specific area 53 is converted into a closed state by moving the specific area opening / closing member 52 toward the front (winning restriction position), and the specific area opening / closing member 52 is specified by moving toward the rear (winning allowable position). A flow path switching solenoid 52b for converting the area 53 into an open state and an discharge port 54 into which a game ball that has not flowed into the specific area 53 flows are provided.

Then, when the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 opened during the small hit game, which will be described later, and the game ball is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, the prize ball is not given. After the small hit game is completed, the big hit game described later is executed.

The first large winning opening detection switch 50a is set as a specific area without providing the specific area opening / closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, and is opened during the small hit game described later. By detecting the game ball that has flowed into the winning opening with the first large winning opening detection switch 50a, the big hit game described later may be executed after the small hit game is completed.

In the present embodiment, the big hit game and the small hit game that convert the big winning opening to the open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but the big hit game is treated as a special game and the small hit game is treated as a specific game. There is.

In the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e, it is impossible or easy to win a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (it was determined to be a big hit by the big hit judgment). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning unit 55 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by tilting the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) (one of the bottom surfaces of the first downstream flow path 91e). Along with forming a portion), a second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction and a second large winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward just below the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57. Then, the second large winning opening detection switch 56a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the second large winning opening 56 and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are moved forward (winning restriction position). By doing so, the second prize opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the second prize opening 56 is converted to the open state by moving the second prize opening opening / closing member 57 toward the rear (winning allowable position). A second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57 moves backward and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game, it flows down the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57. When the game ball that has been played or the game ball that has reached the second big winning opening 56 wins the second big winning opening 56 and this game ball is detected by the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of games are played. Game balls of balls (for example, 10 pieces) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls.

Further, the front of the right game area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through, and is the back surface of the decorative member 91 and is in front of the central flow path 91b (opening and closing of the first large winning opening). At a position (immediately above the member 51), a plurality of front protrusions 91b2 protruding rearward are provided at intervals. Further, a plurality of rear protrusions 91b1 are provided on the back wall of the central flow path 91b (immediately above the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51) so as to be alternate with the front protrusions 91b2, and the rear protrusions 91b1 are provided. By forming a meandering flow path between the front protrusion 91b2 and the front protrusion 91b2, the flow velocity (flow force) of the game ball in the central flow path 91b (particularly the upper surface of the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51) is attenuated. There is. Therefore, it takes one second to flow down the upper surface of the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

Further, at a position on the back surface of the decorative member 91, which is in front of the first downstream flow path 91e (immediately above the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57), a plurality of front protrusions 91c2 protruding rearward are spaced apart from each other. It is provided with a space. Further, on the back wall of the first downstream flow path 91e (immediately above the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57), a plurality of rear projections 91c1 are provided so as to alternate with the anterior projections 91c2, and the rear projections 91c1 are provided. By forming a meandering flow path between the portion 91c1 and the front protrusion portion 91c2, the flow velocity (flow force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow path 91e (particularly the upper surface of the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) is attenuated. It has become like. Therefore, it takes one second to flow down the upper surface of the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

Then, the game ball launched into the left game area flows down as it is along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage portion 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. A prize is won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning gate 44, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50) and the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right game area are won (the second major winning opening 56). There is no passing).

Further, the game ball launched into the right game area is passed through the upstream flow path 91a to the central flow path 91b (normal gate 44), the left side flow path 91c, the right side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, and the first. 2 One general winning opening 43, a variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), a first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), which are provided in the right gaming area by flowing down the downstream flow path 91f or the like. Either a prize is won in any of the second variable winning units 55 (second large winning opening 56), or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area are not won.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, a game ball that has won a first large winning opening 50 and a second major winning opening 56, and an out opening 39. An out-ball flow path that accepts and collects out-balls made of inflowing game balls and causes them to flow down is provided, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, there is a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special symbol hold. A hold display device including a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a main information display 69 including a status confirmation display 68 are provided.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol performed based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

The jackpot judgment is special symbol judgment information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random for reach judgment) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47. It corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random value for determining a special figure fluctuation pattern, etc.) and determining whether or not to execute a big hit game or a small hit game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined time has elapsed. The stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Further, when the jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after the lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, small hit mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a big hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 50, 2nd big winning opening 56) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined mode, with a predetermined number of times (with an interval). For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who easily obtains a prize ball by a player who performs the game over 4 times, 10 times, and the like.

The maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning openings (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, but before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won (winning) in the large winning opening, one round game is completed. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage to the player.

Further, the "small hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the small hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. "Small hit game" means that a player who plays a game in which the big winning opening (second big winning opening 56) is converted from a closed state to an open state in a more disadvantageous manner than a big hit game is easy to win a prize ball. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small hit game is a predetermined time, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the large winning opening. When (for example, 10 pieces) wins (balls), the small hit game ends. In addition, unlike the big hit game, the game state does not change just by executing the small hit game.

Auxiliary game judgment is the normal map judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol judgment, random value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal map gate 44. Is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired general map determination information. When the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) of notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute an auxiliary game (hit game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (hit game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are won (winning), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. That is, the "auxiliary game" is in a game state in which the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (first hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It is for displaying the number of first hold (U1), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first hold. In addition, although the first hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (second hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is for displaying the number of second hold (U2), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second hold. In addition, although the second hold is stored up to four, it may be less than four or more, or the second hold may not be stored.

The normal symbol hold display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of normal figure hold information (normal figure hold) stored when a game ball wins (passes) at the normal figure gate 44. Is intended to display, and is lit or blinks in a manner indicating the number of pending figures. It should be noted that the maximum number of hold of the normal figure is stored up to four, but the number may be less than or larger than four, or the hold of the normal figure may not be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if it is determined to be a big hit by the big hit judgment, the numbers such as "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, the alphabet such as "A" and "C" is displayed. It is advisable to display the stop and display "-" as a stop when it is determined that the character is lost, and to repeat turning off and "-" during the variable display.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. The lighting is started, the LED is continuously lit during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 4 jackpot games, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the number of rounds is 10 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the firing of a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right-handed) during a big hit state (special game) or a time-saving game state. The LED is turned on during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and the LED is displayed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered. Starts lighting, and turns off the LED when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. As described above, since the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is present. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed in front of (the surface) of the gaming machine 1 and may be installed in another place.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is performed in the same display mode (lighting display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but which mode is set? May be displayed recognizable. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked. And vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the status confirmation display 68 may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol hold display 63, the second special symbol hold display 64, and the round number display are displayed. Since 66, the right-handed display 67 and the like are turned off, one or a plurality of LEDs of these displays may be turned on.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the effect space 40a imaged inside the decorative frame 40, and is the lower part of the effect space 40a to display the first image. A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display having a size and a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 is provided in front of the device 70, and is provided at the upper part of the effect space 40a. A movable effect device 73 for executing an operation effect is provided, and a variation notification LED 59 for notifying a variation display state of a special symbol is provided on the right side of the effect space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect performed during non-execution of the variable display of the special symbol, a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and execution of a jackpot game. There is a big hit production etc. performed inside.

Further, the second image display device 71 can perform a movement effect by moving with a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) configured by a solenoid, a motor, or the like while the fluctuation effect is being executed by the first image display device 70. It has become.

Specifically, the vertical direction is between the standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and the effect position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. By moving (ascending, descending) to, the movement effect is performed. The movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal display) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) and execution of variable effect are executed. A mode display area or the like indicating the effect mode according to the above is formed.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The effect symbol 70a is configured to stop and display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in an mode of notifying the result of the big hit determination (missing mode, big hit mode, small hit mode). The big hit mode and the small hit mode are combinations of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the loss mode is another mode.

The mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or it may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot. good.

Further, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device according to the result of the jackpot determination. By displaying the image on 71, the player's expectation that the jackpot game (special game) is executed is increased.

The first image display device 70 includes a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in a normal gaming state described later. The second hold icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state described later, and the variable effect are being executed. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that, the first hold number display area 70E for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and the second hold number (U2). A second reserved number display area 70F or the like for displaying a numerical value is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B has a first display unit 70B1 (first area), a second display unit 70B2 (second area), and a third display unit 70B3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. , 4th display unit 70B4 (4th area), and the 1st display unit 70B1 to the 4th display unit 70B4 have a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1). Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays the second hold icon. The first hold icon indicating the first hold memory for executing the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, and the third display unit 70B3 is the third to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. The first hold icon indicating the hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D has a first display unit 70D1 (first area), a second display unit 70D2 (second area), a third display unit 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display unit 70D4 (from the left side). The first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon. The second hold icon indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the third display unit 70D3 is displayed with the second special symbol change display executed second. A second hold icon indicating the hold memory is displayed, and a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and rides on or floats on the pedestal image. The icon is displayed as shown.

Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is moved toward the icon display area 70C one by one. By moving (shifting) and moving (shifting) the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the icon display area 70C, the icon becomes the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed. The icon disappears (erases) at the end of.

In addition, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts) one by one toward the icon display area 70C with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). ), The second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 performs variable display of the effect symbol 70a, but either one or both of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 is used. The variable display of the effect symbol 70a may be performed.

The movable effect device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the like during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to execute the operation effect. Further, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined mode during the execution of the operation effect. ..

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located closer to the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and closer to the center (lower side) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (ascend, descend) to and from the position of the production position (second position). The second movable member 73b is adapted to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position that recedes from the front of the first movable member 73a. ..

The fluctuation notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED, and is provided with a first fluctuation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second fluctuation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first variation notification LED 59a starts a color change (variation display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and colors corresponding to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the first special symbol), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is variable display. The second variation notification LED 59b starts a color change (variation display of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and colors in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the second special symbol), it is notified whether or not the second special symbol is variable display.

In addition, the result of the variation display (big hit determination) of the first special symbol is notified by the combination of the stopped display effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol, and the combination of the stop display effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol is used. The result of the variation display (special game range) of the second special symbol may be notified. In addition, the result of the variation display (big hit determination) of the first special symbol is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the variation display (big hit determination) of the second special symbol is notified only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. The result may be notified.

Further, instead of displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first fluctuation notification LED 59a or the second fluctuation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed on the first image display device 70 or the first image display device 70 or the second. 2 The image display device 71 may be used for variable display.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game supplied from a payout device 95 for paying out a game ball based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball lending), an island facility, or the like. A game ball storage unit 96 that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A having a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 are built-in. An effect control device 130A, a power supply device 160A having a built-in power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer), and the like are provided.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes in the left-right direction around the rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire effect control device from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes a volume of effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74). A changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the amount of light is provided.

On the front surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m are cleared or the game is at the stage of the advantage of the game (big hit determination). Input the signal to update the setting value (of the probability of being judged as a big hit) RWM clear switch 111a, input the signal to shift to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later by the operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, other electronic components, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left, and set by the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of values and performance information is configured (see FIG. 49).

(Composition of the game board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 constituting the front side of the game board 5 and a back surface unit 501 constituting the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a game plate 500a made of transparent resin in which a game area 5a is formed on the surface of the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 described above, and a window portion is formed so that the rear can be visually recognized. ..

Then, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the solenoid gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first starting port 45 (first starting port detection switch 45a), and the variable Starting unit 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning unit 49 (first large winning opening 50, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, First prize opening opening / closing member 51, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, specific area 53, specific area detection switch 53a, flow path switching solenoid 52b, discharge port 54), and second variable winning unit 55 (second). A large winning opening 56, a second large winning opening detection switch 56a, a second large winning opening opening / closing member 57, a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and the above-mentioned main information display 69 is provided outside the game area 5a. It is provided.

Further, at the lower right of the game plate 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp having identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are provided at the four corners of the 500a.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game plate 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with a fingertip and rotated toward the left side.

The fixture 503a is provided at the operation portion located on the front surface side of the game plate 500a, the shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back surface side of the game plate 500a, and the tip end of the shaft portion, and the back surface of the game plate 500a. It is equipped with an engaging piece located on the side, and by operating the operation unit, the engaging piece changes between the first state (non-engaged posture) and the second state (engaged posture). There is.

The back surface unit 501 has a unit base 501a in which the front surface is formed in a concave chamber shape and a window portion that makes the rear view visible is formed. In the concave chamber, a second image display device 71 is formed. , A movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) and the like are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window portion. Further, an effect control device 130A is provided on the rear side of the first image display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the effect control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixed receiving portions 503b for detachably attaching the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixing tool 503a described above are provided.

When the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the board unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side portion of the back surface unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a is in a state of entering the inside of the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging piece is set to the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging piece engages with the fixed receiving portion 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 And are fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the board unit 500 is opened. And the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate stamp plate 502. After that, when the engaging piece is set to the first state by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging piece and the fixed receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a exit from the fixed receiving portion 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the gaming board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of a like-new game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment / detachment of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state where the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, the game board 5 in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back surface unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, it is possible to replace (like new) only the board unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board unit 500, it is advisable to perform the above-mentioned removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the effect control board 130 that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the effect control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the effect control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be sent to the board 130 in only one direction.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like. It has 110m.

Out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start port detection switch 45a, second start port detection switch 47a, second start port opening / closing are connected to the input / output port of the main control unit 110m. Magnet 48b, 1st prize opening detection switch 50a, 1st prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, specific area detection switch 53a, 2nd prize opening detection switch 56a, 2nd prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b , Magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, ordinary symbol display 62, first special symbol hold display 63, second special symbol hold display 64 , Ordinary symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67, status confirmation indicator 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information indicator 113, payout control The board 120 and the effect control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission / reception of various control commands are performed. Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like are performed.

In the "game information", the start opening winning signal, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol variation display, which is output every time the game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, is stopped. A symbol confirmation signal output for each, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of a big winning opening), and an output over a time-saving gaming state described later. Examples thereof include a time saving state signal to be executed, a security signal to be output when a problematic (threatening) situation (such as RWM clearing or error) occurs in the security of the gaming machine 1.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

Access to the memory area of the main ROM 110b is prohibited: a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored. A vector table in which an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as a program title and version are stored, and a start address of a timer interrupt process described later are set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and the end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in order.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. The information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program are arranged in order. There is.

The game RWM area temporarily stores the game work area used as the work by the game program, the first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the game program. A game stack area for temporarily evacuating and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The game work area changes depending on the progress of the game, the set value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and the game progress. Game data areas for storing game data (variation times described later, various time reduction state flags, various time reduction times, etc.) are arranged in order.

The information RWM area temporarily saves the information work area used as the work by the information program, the unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the information program. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for processing based on the game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for processing based on the information program Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. In addition, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the content of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but it can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, when performing processing based on the information program, in the processing based on the game program, after saving the flag register in the game RWM area, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the information is used. Immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are used in the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer in the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when the information program returns to the game program. There will be no such thing.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output port of the payout control unit 121 has an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 95, and a payout device 95 for paying out the game ball. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input / output port, and the like.
A ball feed solenoid 11b, a touch sensor 15a, a firing volume 15b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input / output ports of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid has a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The effect control board 130 displays an image based on the effect control unit 130 m that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command 130 m from the effect control unit 130 m. A display control unit 140 that controls audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on the reception of effect control commands from the effect control unit 130m. It is equipped with.

The effect control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

An effect button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input / output port of the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, the control process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and the detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc. are performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or the sound output device 9 controls a predetermined sound. And control to output sound.

The display control unit 140 is a control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the control control unit 141. For receiving voice control commands from the image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, and the control control unit 141. Based on this, it includes a voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) that controls the voice output device 9, and a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes a centralized CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an image control unit 145 (VDP) and a voice control unit 148 (voice). It has an input / output port to which the LSI) is connected.

The integrated CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the integrated control program stored in the integrated ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the integrated RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process and an audio output device for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140. Control processing for generating a voice control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) is performed.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

The input / output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include a frame lighting device 10, an effect button drive device 17b (effect button drive motor, effect button vibration motor), an effect button light emitting LED 17c, a start port lamp 75, a movable effect device 73, and a panel. The lighting device 74 is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the effect button drive device 17b, the effect button light emitting LED 17c, the start port lamp 75, the movable effect device 73, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for operating the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, etc.). Supply to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to the power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (power failure has occurred), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the power supply voltage drop (power failure occurred). It includes a disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is disconnected (power failure).

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 to obtain a voltage drop detection signal. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than the predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power outage (power outage) after the recovery from the power outage (power outage). Can be done.

Although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130 m, the payout control board 120 and the payout control board 120 and the sub RAM 130c are retained so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control unit 130 m. Further, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130 m.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time saving game state)" and a "time saving game state" as states relating to the ease of winning a game ball to the second starting port 47.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal gaming state". Further, even during the jackpot game, the "normal gaming state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the gaming state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "normal game state (non-time saving game state)" means that the probability of being determined to be a hit is 1/256 in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. It is a gaming state in which the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 0.180 seconds when the winning is won.

On the other hand, in the "time saving game state", the probability of being determined to be a hit is set as high as 255/256, the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to about 3 seconds, and it is determined to be a hit. In this case, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 6 seconds, which means a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in which the consumption of the gaming ball is suppressed as compared with the normal gaming state. The transition from the normal game state to the time-saving game state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, the "time saving game state" is based on the normal time saving game state controlled after the end of the big hit game described later (via the big hit game) and the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, the end of the big hit game). A special time-saving game state in which the number of times of variation display of the special symbol executed from (clearing 0 of the number of fluctuations) reaches a specified number of times (500 times in this embodiment) is controlled (without going through the jackpot game). Is set.

It should be noted that the "short-time gaming state" is set to be more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" in that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit are more advantageous. , The average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit may be set to be advantageous.

Although the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal gaming state is 1/256, the probability of being determined to be a hit may be set to 0/256 so that the probability of being determined to be a hit may not be determined. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the normal game state, and the game ball does not enter (win) the second starting port 47.

(Various storage areas of the main RAM)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a special figure in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 and / or the second start opening 47 is stored. It is a figure which shows the determination information storage area, FIG. 6 (b) is a figure which shows the structure of each storage part of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG. 6D is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal map determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45. The area, the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area in which the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and the special figure judgment information in which the variation display is being executed are stored. The special figure determination information storage area is divided into a first special figure determination information holding storage area and a second special figure determination information holding storage area, each of which is divided into a first storage unit and a fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. It corresponds to the unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4, respectively. Further, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display unit 70D1 and the second display unit 70D2 of the second reservation icon display area 70D. Corresponds to the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and these special figure determination information can be used. The corresponding number of first hold icons will be displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display area 70B. Further, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information is the second reserved number (U2), and the number corresponding to these determination information. The hold icon is displayed on the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 6B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random value. The area is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing the reach determination random value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing the special figure variation pattern determination random value.

Then, when the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored most in the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having a small number. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the number of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is the smallest in which the special figure determination information is not stored. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

When the start condition of the variation display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. The determination information is shifted and will be referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the start condition of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information reserved storage area is shifted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), the normal map determination information storage area varies from the normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44 is stored. It is divided into a normal map determination information storage area in which display is being executed, and the normal map determination information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively. The number of normal map determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal map determination information reservation storage area is the number of normal map reservation information.

As shown in FIG. 6D, each storage unit has a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value and a normal symbol determination random number storage for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining a normal map fluctuation pattern for storing a random number value for determining a normal map variation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and the normal map determination information is acquired, it is acquired in the storage unit having the smallest number in which the normal map determination information is not stored in the normal map determination information reserved storage area. The normal map judgment information is stored.

When the start condition of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is satisfied, the 0th storage unit, which is the normal map judgment information execution storage area, shifts the normal figure judgment information stored in the 1st storage unit of the normal figure judgment information hold storage area. And will usually be referenced to perform variable display of symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the preparation process for starting the control of the game, the setting change process for changing the set value based on the setting change operation, and the initialization of the predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on the RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching) Performs drive source initial operation processing and the like for initial operation of the solenoid 52b) and the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b). The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S51, the jackpot determination initial random value, the special symbol determination initial random value, the hit determination initial random value, The initial random value for normal symbol determination is updated.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine if a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process is transferred to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process is transferred to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process is transferred to step S54 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period, the power supply can be momentarily dropped in voltage. The process is transferred to step S52 as having the property.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step S55, issues a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process is transferred to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process is transferred to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining payout number specification command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number specification command is saved, and if the remaining payout number specification command is not received, the remaining payout number is specified. Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the payout control process of timer interrupt described later, and a command for specifying the number of payouts according to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the data abnormality of the game RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

The main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (power recovery) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S61, and prohibits RWM access in step S62. After that, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. The machine will not perform unintended operations, and it will be possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are waited for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S17 assuming that the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the power is turned on for the first time or irregular power restoration (steps S18 to step). The process is transferred to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power failure during execution of S35).

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S18 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S19 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value (probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage of the game is changed (updated), and the setting key switch 112a is operated. Performs the process of confirming the set value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is transferred to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process is performed in step S22. To move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, assuming that the power is turned on for the first time or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. Will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process is performed in step S22. Move.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing (game program). Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibits timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 is to perform a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the control of the game is not performed (the game cannot be controlled), and the error cannot be cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without the setting change operation, the power switch is not canceled and the setting is made. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" displays an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to let the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. Or, the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the sound output device 9 indicates that a recovery error has occurred. It is to output an error sound ("It is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S23 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S24 as if the RWM clear operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. The path switching solenoid 52b and the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are subjected to processing for initial operation over a predetermined period. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

"Power-on notification" is to display the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or to display a frame. It indicates that the lighting device 10 or the lighting device 74 for the panel is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9. The power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the RWM area was cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. A display for notifying that may be displayed.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S27 whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and ending the confirmation of the set value by operating the setting key switch 112a. I do.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, the above-mentioned various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are initially used for a predetermined period. Perform the process to operate. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off by ending the setting confirmation notification and the like.

"Power recovery notification" is to display the power recovery screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) in order to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, or for a frame. It indicates that the lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the power supply is restored from the audio output device 9 (from a power failure). The power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S32, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure holdings, and also performs a process for displaying the first holding icon and the second holding icon on the image display device.

In step S33, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). The timer interrupt of the board 110) is started, and the initial setting process of this time is completed.

That is, from the time the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the state is before the start before the game progress control is started, and after the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is performed. It will be ready for the game to be played.

In this way, while the settings are being changed (during the setting change mode) or the settings are being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, and the second are on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the panel lighting device 74, and on the back surface (back surface), the setting is changed by checking the information display 113. It is possible to recognize that it is inside. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front surface (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, although the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent including the information indicating the current game state, the current game state is sent after the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent. You may send a game state specification command indicating.

Further, by not determining the presence / absence of the setting changing flag, the unrecoverable error processing may not be performed even if the previous power failure occurs during the setting change.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the unrecoverable error processing. ..

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
A timer interrupt process (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds). It is executed by that, and it is designed to control the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs a time control process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as a stop time of a special symbol and an opening time of a special electric accessory.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process (game program) in step S120. Specifically, the random number value for jackpot judgment, the random number value for special symbol judgment, the random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, the random number value for hit judgment, the random number value for normal symbol judgment, and the random number value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. The initial random number value to be set is set as a new lap initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process (game program) in step S130. Specifically, as in step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first winning opening detection switch 50a, the second winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. , It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the specific area detection switch 53a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program). Specifically, the determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the large winning opening. Processing such as opening / closing (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) and setting the game state is performed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs the Fuzu-fuden control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of the acquired normal map determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44, variable display of the normal symbol, opening / closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like is performed. The details of the Fuzu Fuden control process will be described later.

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure and normal electric control process are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal map and electric control process, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (game program) in step S500. Specifically, referring to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second). A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the large winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (game program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning in the second starting port 47 when not in an auxiliary game, or a game ball winning in a large winning opening when not in a special game, various winnings An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls won in the mouth and the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path that causes the winning ball to flow down do not match, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error that detects an abnormal radio wave by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period, a door opening error that the open detection switch 31a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and the RWM clear switch 111a while the progress control of the game is being performed. And an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is determined, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 110a performs a data creation process (game program) in step S700. Specifically, the start opening opening / closing data output to the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, the large winning opening opening / closing data output to the first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b, and the first special symbol. Display 60, special symbol display data output to the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold display 63, second special symbol hold display 64. Performs a process of creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs the external information data creation process in step S720. Specifically, a process of creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. The details of the external information data creation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, the port output for outputting the signal such as the start opening opening / closing data and the big winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, or outputting the signal such as the game information data created in step S720. Processing, display output processing to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data, and payout status confirmation to check the payout status of the payout control board 120. A designated command is sent to the payout control board 120, or a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings is referred to by referring to the prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. Is sent to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call-time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of normal medium payouts, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during the normal gaming state, and out during the normal gaming state. For counting game performance information such as the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. Perform processing.

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting the numbers, it is possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which is useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a normally performs a base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number ÷ normal medium out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. The process of saving the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is performed in the first area of.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored. The second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, the third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and the normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the normal base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return time process. Specifically, a process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode) before the game progress control is started, so that the payout is performed. Since the number and the number of outs are not counted, the normal base value is calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the general winning opening detection switch input process in step S210. Specifically, for determining whether the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and paying out the winning ball from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, has the detection signal been input from the first prize opening detection switch 50a or the second prize opening detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball has won the first prize opening 50 or the second prize opening 56. It is determined whether or not the prize ball has been paid out, and a process for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information. The details of the first start port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information. The details of the second start port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal map gate 44, and acquiring and storing the normal map determination information. I do.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs the specific area detection switch input process and ends the current input control process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the specific area detection switch input process will be described later.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch Input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the three prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination is performed. Information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random value for reach judgment, random value for judgment of special figure fluctuation pattern) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first hold number (U1) is less than 4. If the first hold number (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the first hold number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port detection switch input process this time is performed. To finish.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the first hold number (U1) is set. The corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and the vacant storage units are acquired in step S230-3. The figure judgment information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state (normal gaming state) is in progress. When the game is in the normal game state, the process is transferred to step S230-9 to pre-read the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and the game is not in the normal game state. In this case, the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is not performed, and the present first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (preliminary determination process) in step S230-9. In this first pre-reading process, a pre-judgment table (see FIG. 23 (a) or FIG. 23 (b)) for pre-reading (pre-judgment) the special figure determination information is selected, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is used as the first. (1) A process is performed in which a pre-determination is performed before the variation display of the special symbol is performed, and a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special symbol scheduled variation pattern) is performed. The details of the pre-judgment table will be described later.

Since this "first look-ahead designation command" is information that can specify the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern, the effect control board 130 uses the first look-ahead designation command to determine the type of special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the special symbol. It is also possible to specify the type, the type of big hit game or small hit game (number of rounds), and the number of various time reductions (J1, J2, J3) in the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command generated in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and even before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command is started, one or a plurality of variable displays are hit. A look-ahead notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that expects the game to be executed will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the first hold number (U1) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit of the second hold may be smaller than the upper limit of the second hold. Further, the first reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area.

(Second start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a second start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S240-1 whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is input, the process is transferred to step S240-2, and when the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is not input, the present second 2 Start port detection switch Ends the input process.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating two prize balls to the two prize ball counter used for the two prize balls, and in step S240-3, the special figure determination is performed. Information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random value for reach judgment, random value for judgment of special figure fluctuation pattern) is acquired.

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second hold number (U2) is less than 4. If the second hold number (U2) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S240-5, and if the second hold number (U2) is not less than 4, the second start port detection switch input process this time is performed. To finish.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second hold number (U2) and updating (U2 ← U2 + 1), and in step S240-6, the second hold number (U2) is set. The corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area, and the vacant storage units are acquired in step S240-3. The figure judgment information is stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is in progress. If the game is in the time-saving game state, the process is moved to step S240-9 to pre-read the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, and the non-time-saving game state is in progress. If not, the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 is not performed, and the present second start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a has a predetermined number of remaining time reductions (here, the second time reduction number (J2), not the first time reduction number (J1) or the third time reduction number (J3)). For example, it is determined whether or not the number is 5 times or more. If the number of remaining time reductions is not more than the predetermined number, the process is transferred to step S240-10, and if the number of remaining time reductions is not more than the predetermined number, the game is acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47. Assuming that the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information is not performed, the second start port detection switch input process of this time is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a second look-ahead process (preliminary determination process) in step S240-10. In this second pre-reading process, a pre-judgment table (see FIG. 26 (c)) for pre-reading (pre-judgment) the special figure determination information is selected, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is displayed in a variable manner of the second special symbol. Is performed in advance, and a process of generating a second pre-reading designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, look-ahead information) is performed.

Since this "second look-ahead designation command" is information that can specify the judgment result of the special figure determination information, the effect control board 130 uses the second look-ahead designation command to determine the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, and the special. It is also possible to specify the type of symbol, the type of big hit game or small hit game (number of rounds), and the number of various time reductions (J1, J2, J3) in the normal time reduction game state after the end of the big hit game.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second look-ahead designation command generated in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and even before the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second look-ahead designation command is started, the jackpot game is over one or a plurality of variation displays. The look-ahead notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that is expected to be executed will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit of the second hold may be smaller than the upper limit of the first hold. Further, the second reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing of the main control board)
A specific area detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific area detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S260-1 whether or not the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input. When the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input, the process is transferred to step S260-2, and when the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is not input, the current specific area detection switch input is performed. End the process.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is during the specific area valid period during which the passage of the game ball to the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit game (conversion game) is in progress. If the small hit game is in progress, the process is transferred to step S260-3, and if the specific area is not in the valid period, the process is transferred to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a has a specific area passage flag indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 during the small hit game, and a specific area indicating the game state when the game ball has passed the specific area 53. The game state information when passing through the area (information indicating that the game is in the normal game state if the current state is the normal game state, information indicating that the game state is in the time-saving game state if the current state is the time-saving game state) is used for the game RWM of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the area, and in step S260-4, a specific area passage designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 during the specific area valid period is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time. Ends the specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, the specific area passage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the passage notification effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (the jackpot game is executed) is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 during the small hit game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the specific area this time. The detection switch input process ends.

As a result, the specific area passage error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the passage error notification effect for notifying the occurrence of the passage error that the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing is executed. Therefore, the employee of the amusement store can grasp the occurrence of the passage error and take appropriate measures.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special figure special electric control process is completed.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the processing for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold storage (special figure judgment information) and the special figure special electric processing data are changed to "1". A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for performing such a process is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the processing for stopping and displaying the special symbol and sending the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 130 and the special figure special electric processing data are changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing processing or the like is executed.
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if it is a lost special symbol, and the opening time of the jackpot game is set if it is a big hit special symbol. Then, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small hit special symbol, the opening time of the small hit game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "4". Step S330) is executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the big hit game processing for performing the processing for executing the big hit game, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round game, etc. ( Step S340) is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing for executing the small hit game and the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0" or "3" based on the end of the ending of the small hit game are performed. The small hit game process (step S350) for the purpose is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 5, the big hit game end processing for performing the processing for ending the big hit game, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0" based on the end of the big hit game, etc. (Step S360) is executed.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
A special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S310-1 whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol variation display is in progress, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a is updated by subtracting "1" from the second reserved number (U2), and in step S310-6, the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the subtracted second reserved number (U2) is specified. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, in the second special figure determination information storage area. The stored data is shifted, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure determination information used in the previous game that has been played is deleted.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines in step S310-4 whether or not the first hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first hold number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first hold number (U1) after the subtraction. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores in the first special symbol hold storage area in step S310-8. The shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol hold display data indicating the first hold number (U1) and the second hold number (U2) after subtraction is displayed in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 are updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reserved storage area and shifted (the second reserved number is first reserved). Although it was decided to prioritize subtraction over the number, the first special figure determination information reserved storage area or the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted (first) in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port. The number of holds and the number of second holds may be subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special figure determination information hold storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure judgment information hold storage area (the first hold number may be deducted). It may be subtracted in preference to the second reserved number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit and the stop special figure data of the special symbol based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot judgment process. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variation effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. The details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , Start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variation display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output by the output control process of the step S800. The special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 will display the variation of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and ends the current special symbol memory determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the customer waiting state is set. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state means a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is used for producing the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demo effect for encouraging the player to play the game is performed.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
The jackpot determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process on the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the set value stored in the set value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, the big hit for determining whether or not it is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit). Select the determination table (see FIG. 17). The details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the jackpot determination random number value with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot (whether or not it is a small hit). If it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S311-4, and if it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, determines the special symbol for the jackpot to determine the type of the jackpot special symbol. Select the table (see FIG. 18 (a)) and move to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for big hits will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the jackpot determination random number value with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot is a small hit. If it is a small hit, the process is transferred to step S311-7, and if it is not a small hit, the process is transferred to step S311-8 as if it is a loss.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small hits (see FIG. 18B) for determining the type of the small hit special symbol, and shifts the process to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for small hits will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for loss (see FIG. 18 (c)) for determining a special loss symbol, and shifts the process to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for loss will be described later.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the random value for special symbol determination for which the jackpot determination is performed with the special symbol determination table. A special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display executed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special figure data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot, and FIG. 7B is a determination to be a small hit. It is a special symbol determination table for small hits referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time, and FIG. 18 (c) shows the loss referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be lost. It is a special symbol judgment table for.

As shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, in the special symbol determination table, the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the determination thereof. The stop special symbol data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated with each other, and the lighting mode of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbol "01" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of three round games, and the special symbol "02" executes the second jackpot game consisting of three round games. It is a jackpot symbol, and the special symbol "03" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of three round games, and the special symbol "11" consists of ten round games. It is a jackpot symbol that executes the fourth jackpot game. Further, the special symbol "12" is a jackpot special symbol for executing the fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games, and the special symbol "13" is a small hit special symbol for executing the first small hit game. The special symbol "14" is a small hit special symbol for executing the second small hit game, and the special symbol "15" is a small hit special symbol for executing the third small hit game. ing.

The details will be described later, but the degree of advantage of the various jackpot games is as follows: 3rd jackpot game <1st jackpot game <2nd jackpot game <4th jackpot game = 5th jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the types of the big hit special symbol, the small hit special symbol, and the loss special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. At least one of the big hit special symbol and the small hit special symbol may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the selection ratio of various lost symbols, the selection ratio of various big hit special symbols, and the selection ratio of various small hit symbols do not change depending on the set value and are constant. Can be mentioned. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the small hit special symbol and the loss special symbol are displayed rather than the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up when the jackpot special symbol is displayed. One point is that the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the type of the displayed special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that when displaying a lost special symbol rather than the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol. The point is that the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the type of the displayed special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the LED (light emitting member) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol lights up when displaying the lost special symbol. The same as the LED (light emitting member) of the special symbol display is included. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that it is not a big hit special symbol but a small hit special symbol or a loss special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is a big hit (first result). If it is determined, any of the first to third big hit games can be executed, and the special figure determination information (second special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is the big hit. When it is determined to be (first result), it is possible to execute any of the fourth to fifth jackpot games. By doing so, since the types of jackpot games that can be executed change according to the types of special symbols, it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

Although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. May be good.

Further, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the jackpot special symbol may be larger or smaller than three. Further, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol may be larger or smaller than two, but even in this case, the large hit special symbol may be displayed. It may be different from the number of LEDs of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying.

Also, the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol and the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the lost special symbol are not included (if they are completely different). You may do it.

Further, although the big hit determination table for the first special symbol does not win the small hit, the small hit may be won. In this case, it is preferable that the winning probability is lower than that of the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment processing of the main control board)
A special figure variation pattern determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is normal. If it is in the normal gaming state, the process is transferred to step S313-2, and if it is not in the normal gaming state, the process is transferred to step S313-3 assuming that it is in the time-saving gaming state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding (matching the game situation) table from the normal special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 20) for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state. Then, the process is transferred to step S313-4. The details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a corresponds (matches the game situation) from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 21 to 25) for time saving for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the time saving game state. Is selected, and the process is transferred to step S313-4. The details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for shortening the time will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the determination result of the special symbol, the reach determination random number value, the holding number (U1 or U2), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random value. The special figure fluctuation pattern is determined by collating with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, the variation corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set. The pattern specification command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

The main CPU 110a is specially executed in step S313-7 from the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c, specifically, the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game). The number of fluctuation display of the symbol is updated by +1. The number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol, or the variable display of the second special symbol. The number of fluctuations will be referred to in the special symbol fluctuation processing described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game state is shortened. If it is not in the time-saving game state, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is terminated, and if it is in the time-saving game state, in step S313-9, a time-saving number designation command according to the remaining time-saving number of times is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the time reduction number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining time reduction number of times is notified. When this process is completed, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process this time is completed.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal use)
FIG. 20 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for normal use, which is referred to when determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 20A shows the variation display when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of fluctuations to the special time-saving gaming state is 51 or more. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for normal use referred to in the case of (effect mode A to C), and FIG. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for normal use referred to when the fluctuation display is executed when the number of times is 50 or less (during the countdown mode described later), and FIG. It is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 3 for normal use referred to when the variation display corresponding to the remaining hold of the second special symbol after the transition to the state is executed.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal time reduction)
21 to 24 are special figure variation pattern determination tables for normal time reduction, which are referred to when determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal time reduction gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 21A shows a case where 7 times is selected as the number of time reductions (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time reduction game state and the remaining number of small hits is 1. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for normal time reduction referred to when the fluctuation display before the last time reduction is executed (during the rush battle mode described later), and FIG. 21 (b) shows the normal time reduction gaming state. Refer to the case of executing the variable display of the last round of time reduction when the number of time reductions of the second special symbol is selected to 7 times and the remaining number of small hits is 1 (during the rush battle mode described later). It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 2 for normal time reduction.

FIG. 22A shows a case where 55 times, 95 times or 496 times are selected as the time reduction number (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time reduction gaming state, and the remaining number of small hits is one. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 3 for normal time reduction referred to when the variation display before the last round of time reduction is executed (during the random dance mode described later), and FIG. 22 (b) shows the normal time reduction gaming state. When 55 times, 95 times, or 496 times are selected as the time reduction number (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to, and the variation display of the last time reduction when the remaining number of small hits is 1 is executed. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 4 for normal time reduction referred to (in the random dance mode described later).

In FIG. 23 (a), 95 times is selected as the time reduction number (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time reduction game state, and the time reduction final inning is compared with the case where the remaining number of small hits is 2. FIG. 23 (b) is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 5 for normal time reduction, which is referred to when the previous fluctuation display is executed (during the super-random dance mode described later), and FIG. 2 Refer to the case of executing the variation display of the final time reduction when 95 times is selected as the time reduction number (J2) of the special symbol and the remaining number of small hits is 2 (during the super-random dance mode described later). It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 6 for normal time reduction.

FIG. 24 (a) is more than the final time reduction when 496 times are selected as the time reduction number (J2) of the second special symbol and the remaining number of small hits is 2 at the time of transition to the normal time reduction game state. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 7 for normal time saving referred to when the previous variation display is executed (in the infinite mode described later), and FIG. 24 (b) is the second in the transition to the normal time saving gaming state. Normal referred to when executing the variation display of the last round of time reduction when 496 times is selected as the number of time reductions (J2) of the special symbol and the remaining number of small hits is 2. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 8 for time saving.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for special time reduction)
FIG. 25 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for normal time reduction, which is referred to when determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in a special time reduction gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 25A shows a case where there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c in a special time-saving gaming state, or a case where there is jackpot history information and the number of remaining small hits is two. In any case, it is a special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for special time saving referred to when the variation display is executed for the second time or later from the start of the special time saving game state (during the infinite mode described later), and FIG. 25. (B) is referred to in the case of executing the variable display of the first time reduction when the main RAM 110c has the big hit history information and the remaining number of small hits is 2 in the special time reduction game state (in infinite mode). It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 2 for normal time reduction, and FIG. 25 (c) shows a case where variation display is executed when the number of remaining small hits is one in the special time reduction gaming state ( It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time saving referred to in the random dance mode described later).

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol (starting port) for displaying the variation, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the determination result of the special symbol (stop special symbol data) are displayed. ), The reach determination random number value, the first hold number (U1) or the second hold number (U2), the special figure variation pattern determination random value, the special figure variation pattern as the determination result, and the special symbol. It is associated with the fluctuation time, and the production content in the fluctuation production is described as a reference.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can at least specify the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. Further, although the details will be described later, since the big hit game and the small hit game are executed depending on the type of the special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the big hit game and the small hit game can be specified. Further, since the number of time-saving game states (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the time-saving number of times can be specified.

As the effect contents shown in the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, "normal variation", "shortening variation", and "ultra-shortening variation" are three effect symbols 70a that fluctuate at high speed. , Means to stop without reaching.

Further, "reach" means that the player is expected to perform a jackpot game in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode to be caused. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), the same effect symbol 70a is "7" in the left side region and the right side region. Refers to a mode in which the remaining effect symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped at.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is deformed slightly to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It has become a reach. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not make a big hit, but the "normal reach" may be used to make a big hit.

In addition, "SP reach" is performed after the normal reach, and is a super reach production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach.

Further, "SPSP reach" is performed after the normal reach or after the super reach, and is a special reach production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect rather than "SP reach".

Further, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that is performed after the normal reach or after the super reach, and the big hit is confirmed. For example, from the blackout effect, all three effect symbols 70a are the same and fluctuate at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect than "SPSP reach". ing.

In addition, the "revival long fluctuation" is a production that pretends to be a big hit when it shifts to the normal game state. For example, a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

In addition, "revival fluctuation" is a production that makes a small hit by pretending to shift to the normal game state. For example, a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device for a shorter time than the revival long fluctuation.

In addition, "rush battle reach" means whether or not a friendly character and an enemy character battle and enter the random dance mode, super random dance mode, or infinite mode described later (either loss, big hit, or small hit). ) Is a reach production. It should be noted that the mode is advantageous for the player in the order of random dance mode <super random dance mode <infinite mode.

In addition, the "final battle reach" is whether or not the ally character and the enemy character perform the final battle and enter the random dance mode, the super random dance mode, or the infinite mode described later (either a loss, a big hit, or a small hit). It is a reach production that fuels (becoming).

In addition, "promotion battle reach" means whether or not a friendly character and an enemy character battle and are promoted from the random dance mode described later to the super random dance mode or the infinite mode (either loss, big hit, or small hit). ) Is a reach production.

In addition, the "promotion battle fanning fluctuation" is a production in which a battle is not performed after the ally character and the enemy character have fanned whether or not to perform a battle.

The "result fluctuation" is the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by the big hit game from the normal game state, which is the so-called first hit, in the fluctuation display of the final round of the normal time-saving game state. It is an effect that the result display to be displayed is performed. It should be noted that the result display may be performed not from the first hit but during a series of advantageous periods in which the advantageous state for the player continues.

The "result revival fluctuation" is a revival display suggesting that the result (big hit or small hit) is advantageous to the player after the above-mentioned result display is performed in the final fluctuation display of the normal time-saving game state. It is a production to be performed.

"Continuous battle reach" is a reach that fuels whether or not the super-random dance mode or infinite mode described later will continue (either a loss, a big hit, or a small hit) by having a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. It is a production.

"Undefeated battle reach" is a reach effect that suggests that the ally character and the enemy character battle each other, but the ally character always wins and the result is advantageous to the player (big hit or small hit). ..

"Undefeated battle fanning fluctuation" is a production in which a battle is not performed after the ally character and the enemy character have fanned whether or not to battle.

The "(rush effect) long fluctuation" is an effect that, in the case of the initial change of the special time-saving game state, is a production that is lost after the rush effect suggesting the entry into the special time-saving game state is performed. If it is not the first change in the game state (the change is displayed after the second time), the rush effect is not performed and the effect is lost.

"(Rushing effect) Immediate hit fluctuation" means that, in the case of the initial change of the special time-saving gaming state, the player does not go through the reach after the rushing effect suggesting the entry into the special time-saving gaming state is performed. It is an effect to notify that the result is advantageous (big hit or small hit), and if it is not the first change of the special time saving game state (the change is displayed after the second time), the rush effect is not performed. It is a production that informs the player that the result (big hit or small hit) is advantageous to the player without going through the reach.

"(Rushing effect) undefeated battle reach" means that in the case of the initial change of the special time-saving game state, the above-mentioned undefeated battle reach is performed after the rushing effect suggesting the entry into the special time-saving game state is performed. It is a reach production.

The "rush effect long fluctuation" is an effect that is lost after the rush effect that suggests the entry into the special time-saving game state is performed.

"Rush effect immediate hit fluctuation" is a notification that the result (big hit or small hit) is advantageous to the player without going through the reach after the rush effect suggesting the entry into the special time-saving gaming state is performed. It is a production to be done.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the variation effect in which the result is displayed is performed during the variation display which is the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state (series of advantageous periods). The points to be executed are mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to have the player confirm the result of the game in the series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that during the variation display, which is the final round of the special time-saving gaming state, a special effect is performed without displaying the result. Can be mentioned. By doing so, even though the jackpot game is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied by displaying the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods, and the hobby of the game. Can be improved.

A third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that a special map variation pattern determination table different from the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state is used. By doing so, even in the same time-saving game state, it is possible to make the production contents different between the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the special figure variation pattern determination table that differs depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear) in the initial variation during the special time-saving gaming state is provided. There is a point that it has come to be used. By doing so, it is possible to make the production content during the initial variable display in the special time-saving game state different depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the second to final fluctuations in the special time-saving gaming state are common regardless of the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear). One point is that the special figure variation pattern determination table (special map variation pattern determination table 1 for special time reduction) is used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

The sixth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the variation is shorter in the case of a jackpot during a special time-saving gaming state than in the case of a jackpot during a normal gaming state. The point that the time fluctuation pattern (immediate hit fluctuation in which the reach effect is not executed) is easily determined. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation where the jackpot game in which a special time-saving game state occurs is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the case of a big hit during a special time-saving game state is shorter than the case of a big hit during a normal time-saving game state. The point that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (immediate hit fluctuation in which the reach effect is not executed) can be easily determined. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation where the jackpot game in which a special time-saving game state occurs is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the variation display is executed during the special time-saving gaming state rather than the variation display is executed during the normal time-saving gaming state. In the case, the average fluctuation time is shorter. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation where the jackpot game in which a special time-saving game state occurs is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table that differs between the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state is used. Is a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal time reduction (for example, a special figure variation pattern determination table 3 for normal time reduction, a special figure variation pattern determination table 5 for normal time reduction, or a special figure variation for normal time reduction. A pattern determination table 7 or the like may be used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

Further, in the initial fluctuation during the special time reduction game state, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table that differs depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear) is used, but the same special time reduction pattern determination table (for example, special time reduction) is used. The special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for special time reduction or the special figure variation pattern determination table 2) for special time reduction may be used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

Further, in the final fluctuation during the special time saving game state, the same special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is used regardless of the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear), but a different special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is used. You may do it. By doing so, it is possible to make the production content during the final round variation display in the special time-saving game state different depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 26 is a pre-determination table that is referred to when pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the pre-judgment table, the game state, the type of the special symbol (starting opening), the determination result of the jackpot determination (random value for the jackpot determination), and the determination result of the special symbol (special symbol determination) are displayed. Random value), the reach determination random value, the special figure variation pattern determination random value, and the special figure scheduled variation pattern as the determination result are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol schedule fluctuation pattern" and "look-ahead information" can at least specify the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed. .. Further, although the details will be described later, since the big hit game and the small hit game are executed depending on the type of the special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the big hit game and the small hit game can be specified. Further, since the number of time-saving game states (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the time-saving number of times can be specified.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-mentioned special figure variation pattern determination process has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S320-2, and if the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbol determined by the jackpot determination process described above, and in step S320-3, the stop time according to the game situation is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, 8.0 seconds is set if the variation display is the final round of the time-saving game state, and 0.5 seconds is set if the variation display is other than that.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time saving flag is set, the process is transferred to step S320-5 to update the remaining time saving number, and if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining time saving number is not updated. The process is transferred to S320-13.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol this time is the first special symbol. In the case of the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first special symbol time reduction number (J1), which is the time reduction number of the first special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the first special symbol. The third time reduction number (J3), which is the total time reduction number of the symbol and the second special symbol, is subtracted by 1, and if it is not the first special symbol (the second special symbol), the main is in step S320-7. The second time reduction number (J2), which is the time reduction number of the second special symbol saved in the gaming RWM area of the RAM 110c, and the third time reduction number (J3) described above are subtracted by one.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not any one of the first time reduction number (J1), the second time reduction number (J2), and the third time reduction number (J3) becomes "0". If it becomes "0", the process is transferred to step S320-12 to end the time-saving game state, and if it is not "0", the process is transferred to step S320-9.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S320-9 whether or not the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S320-13, and if it is a small hit special symbol, until the time-saving gaming state saved in the game RWM area is terminated in step S320-10. The remaining number of small hits (Z) is subtracted by 1.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S320-11 whether or not the remaining number of small hits has become "0". When the remaining number of small hits becomes "0", the process is transferred to step S320-12 to end the time saving game state, and when the remaining number of small hits is not "0", step S320 Move the process to -13.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a clears the time saving flag and various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the time saving gaming state.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S320-13 whether or not the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S320-15, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, the time saving flag and various time saving times saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S320-14. Clear (J1, J2, J3) to end the time-saving game state (start the normal game state). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S320-19.

In step S320-15, in step S320-15, the number of fluctuations saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is set to a specified number of times (496 times, which is the maximum time reduction number in the normal time reduction game state + 4 remaining hold numbers). It is determined whether or not it has reached (500 times). When the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the process is transferred to step S320-16 to start the special time-saving game state, and when the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the special time-saving game state is started. The process is transferred to step S320-18 so that the process is not allowed.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a saves the number of time reductions for special time reduction (J1 = 60, J2 = 750, J3 = 750) and the remaining number of small hits (Z = 2) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. , In step S320-17, a special time saving flag is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the game shifts to the special time saving gaming state.

In step S320-18, the main CPU 110a sends a time reduction number designation command corresponding to various time reduction times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, the time reduction number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining time reduction number of times is notified.

In step S320-19, the main CPU 110a sets "2" in the special figure special electric processing data, and issues a game state specification command corresponding to the current game state (game state specified from the presence or absence of the time reduction flag) in the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 performs a process for updating the game state. When this processing is completed, the special symbol variation processing this time is completed.

In this way, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (the small hit game is executed) during the time-saving game state in which it is easy to win the game ball to the second starting port 47, the number of time reductions (J1, J2, Even when J3) remains, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of small hits (Z) becomes "0". Therefore, the player tries to advance the game advantageously by referring to the combination of the look-ahead effect and the effect symbol 70a displayed as a stop (whether or not the player passes the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small hit game and aims at an advantageous big hit. ) However, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the game method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if the remaining number of small hits (Z) remains, the time saving game state ends when the time saving number (any of J1, J2, J3) becomes "0". There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the continuation of the short-time gaming state until the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches the specified number of times, a special time saving game state is generated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that a time saving state occurs without going through the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (500 times) in which the special time-saving game state occurs is a value larger than the maximum time-saving number (496 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, so that during the normal time-saving game state, Since the special time-saving game state does not occur, the inconvenience that the player cannot understand the progress of the game does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (500 times) in which the special time-saving game state occurs is larger than the maximum number of time reductions (496 times) set in the normal time-saving game state by the upper limit number (4) of the second hold number. Therefore, when the maximum number of time reductions (496 times) is set in the normal time reduction game state, it can be made to feel as if the normal time reduction game state has been changed to the special time reduction game state as it is. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the special time saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0. Therefore, the special time-saving game state does not occur again between the big hit games (after the special time-saving game state starts or ends), and the profit balance between the game store side and the player side can be secured. It is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

The maximum number of time reductions (496 times) in the normal time reduction game state is not set to be less than the number of fluctuations (500 times) in which the special time reduction game state occurs, but the maximum number of time reductions in the normal time reduction game state. And the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs may be the same number of times. By doing so, the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, and it is possible to make the user feel as if the normal time-saving game state has been extended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a special time-saving game state flag indicating that the special time-saving game state has already occurred is set to the main RAM 110c (for games). It may be set to RWM). In this case, if there is no special time reduction occurrence flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times (500 times), the number of fluctuations is cleared to 0 to generate a special time reduction game state, and if there is a special time reduction occurrence flag, It is advisable to clear the number of fluctuations to 0 so as not to generate a special time saving game state.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
A special symbol stop process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S330-1 whether or not the stop time set in the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process this time is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-3, and if it is not a big hit special symbol (a small hit special symbol or a lost special symbol), the process is transferred to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a is a big hit according to the stop special figure data (big hit special symbol) from the big winning opening control data determination table (see FIG. 29 (a)) for the big hit game for executing the big hit game. The jackpot opening transition process such as selecting the game control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) is performed, and in step S330-4, the special figure special electric processing data is used to shift to the jackpot game process. “3” is set, and the process is transferred to step S330-8. The details of the big winning opening control data determination table for the big hit game will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-6, and if it is not a small hit special symbol (it is a lost special symbol), the process is transferred to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a changes from the large winning opening control data determination table (see FIG. 29 (b)) for the small hit game for executing the small hit game to the stop special figure data (small hit special symbol). The small hit opening transition process such as selecting the control data (maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) of the corresponding small hit game is performed, and in step S330-7, the special figure special electric processing data is used to shift to the small hit game. “4” is set, and the process is transferred to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, stores the opening designation command for the production transmission data of the main RAM 110c. Set in the area. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the opening effect of the big hit game or the small hit game is performed. When this process is completed, the special symbol stop process this time is completed.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special symbol special electric processing data in order to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

(Control data table)
FIG. 29 (a) is a diagram showing a big prize opening control data determination table for a big hit game for controlling a big winning opening during a big hit game (special game), and FIG. 29 (b) is a diagram showing a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening control data determination table for the small hit opening game for controlling the big winning opening, and FIG. 29C is the small hit game for controlling a specific area during a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the specific area control data determination table for use.

As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the big winning opening control data determination table for the big hit game includes the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the maximum number of round games in the big hit game, and the big winning opening in one round game. The maximum number of winnings to the game, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the types of big winning openings opened in each round game, and the maximum opening of the large winning openings opened in each round game. The number of times, the opening time of the big winning opening for one opening of each round game, and the interval time when the big winning opening is closed after the end of the round game (to eject the game ball from the big winning opening) The required time) is associated with the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game.

When the stop special figure data is "01", the first big hit game in which three round games are performed is executed, and when the stop special figure data is "02", three round games are performed. At the same time, the second big hit game is executed in which the state after the big hit game is more advantageous to the player than the first big hit game, and when the stop special figure data is "03", three round games are performed. , The third big hit game is executed in which the state after the big hit game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first big hit game.

Further, when the stop special figure data is "11", 10 round games are performed, and the 4th big hit game is executed in which the state after the big hit game is more advantageous to the player than the 3rd big hit game. , When the stop special figure data is "12", 10 round games are performed, and the state after the big hit game is more advantageous to the player than the third big hit game (the same advantage as the fourth big hit game). Perform the 5th jackpot game (of degree).

Further, when the stop special figure data is "13", the first V big hit game in which the remaining two round games are performed via the first small hit game which is the first round game is executed, and the stop special is executed. When the figure data is "14", the remaining 9 round games are performed via the second small hit game, which is the first round game, and the first round game is more advantageous to the player than the first V big hit game. When the 2V jackpot game is executed and the stop special figure data is "15", the remaining two round games are performed via the third small hit game which is the first round game, and the first V jackpot is performed. The third V jackpot game is executed, in which the state of the jackpot game may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game.

The feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for the big hit game shown in FIG. 29 (a) is that when the big hit game (1st to 3rd big hit games) based on the winning of the first starting port 45 is executed. , The maximum round (10 rounds) of the jackpot game is not executed, while the maximum round (10 rounds) of the jackpot game (4th to 5th jackpot games) based on the winning of the second starting port 47 is executed. The point that the jackpot game can be executed can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to make the game playability different when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 and when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

As shown in FIG. 29 (b), the large winning opening control data determination table for the small hit game includes the stop special figure data (type of the small hit game) of the special symbol and the large winning opening opened in the small hit game. The maximum number of times of opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening in the small hit game, the opening time until the big winning opening is converted to the open state, the type of big winning opening to open, and one opening The opening time of all the big winning openings, the interval time when the big winning opening is closed (the time required to eject the game ball from the big winning opening), and the small hit game from the last closing of the big winning opening The ending time until the end is associated.

When the stop special figure data is "13", the first small hit game is executed, and when the stop special figure data is "14", the second small hit game is executed, and the stop special figure data is ". In the case of "15", the third small hit game is executed.

The feature of the large winning opening control data determination table for the small hit game shown in FIG. 29B is that the interval time during which the first special winning opening 50 is closed is at least one game from the start to the end of the interval. The time during which the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 (interval time 0.82 seconds for a firing interval of 0.67 seconds) is set. By doing so, the opening time of the first large winning opening 50 can be shortened, and the first large winning opening is within the maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the large winning opening in the predetermined small hit game. The number of times the winning opening is opened can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29 (c), in the specific area control data determination table for the small hit game, the stop special figure data (type of the small hit game) of the special symbol and the specific area 53 opened in the small hit game are displayed. The maximum number of times of opening, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53 are associated with each other.

In the small hit game, regardless of the type of the small hit game, the specific area 53 is converted into the open state when the large winning opening in the small hit game is opened, and the specific area 53 is converted into the closed state when the large winning opening is closed.

As a feature of the specific area control data determination table for the small hit game shown in FIG. 29 (c), there is a probability that the game ball winning the first large winning opening 50 during the small hit game is almost 100% (1/1). The point that the opening / closing timing of the specific area 53 is set so as to pass through the specific area 53 can be mentioned. By doing so, the player can digest the small hit game with peace of mind, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 50 during the small hit game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1), it is 50%. The specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

Further, depending on the type of small hit game, when the specific area 53 is opened and closed so that the game ball winning in the first large winning opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1) (for example, the first). 2 small hit games) and when the specific area 53 is opened and closed so that the game ball winning in the 1st big winning opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of 25% (1/4) (for example, the 3rd small hit). A game) may be provided.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S340-1 whether or not it is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set opening time set by the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is "0" or more. If it is in the opening, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process is transferred to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop process has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-3, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs the round game transition process in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the in-round flag indicating that the round game is in progress is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Set to.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command according to the number of round games (R) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the round effect according to the current round game is performed.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a round game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is in a round game, the process is transferred to step S340-6, and if it is not in a round game, the process is transferred to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening condition of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of this round game is the opening timing of the big winning opening specified by the control data of the big hit game. If the opening condition of the large winning opening is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S340-7, and if the opening condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied, the processing is transferred to step S340-8.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, the type of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 50 or the 2nd big winning opening 56) to be opened from the control data of the big hit game, and the current big winning opening (1st big winning opening 50 or The opening time of the 2nd big winning opening 56) is specified, and the opening time of the big winning opening and the drive data of the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid (the 1st big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are mainly used. It is set in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening will be converted to the open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current opening of the big winning opening is the opening before the final opening in this round game and the opening time has elapsed. If the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S340-9, and if the closing condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied, the processing is transferred to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs the large winning opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) of the current big winning opening (1st big winning opening 50 or 2nd big winning opening 56) is specified from the control data of the big hit game, and the interval time (closed) of the big winning opening is specified. Time) is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the drive data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the transition condition to the interval is satisfied. Specifically, the game balls that have won the big prize opening (1st big winning opening 50 or the 2nd big winning opening 56) in this round game have reached the maximum number of winnings, or the big winning opening in this round game It is determined whether or not the opening time of the final opening has elapsed. If the transition condition to the interval is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S340-11, and if the transition condition to the interval is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs an interval transition process in step S340-11. Specifically, the current interval time (closed time of the big winning opening) is specified from the control data of the big hit game, the interval time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the big winning is set in the main RAM 110c. Clear the drive data of the mouth solenoid. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state. Further, instead of the in-round flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an in-interval flag indicating that the interval is in progress is set. When the interval transition process is completed, the current jackpot game process is completed.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current interval is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is in the interval, the process is transferred to step S340-13, and if it is not in the interval, the process is transferred to step S340-19.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-13 whether or not the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-14, and if the interval time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round game in the current jackpot game is completed. When the final round game is completed, the process is transferred to step S340-17, and when the final round game is not completed, the process is transferred to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs a round game transition process in step S340-15. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Further, the round gaming flag is set instead of the interval flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command according to the number of round games (R) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the round effect according to the current round game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the ending transition process in step S340-17. Specifically, the ending time of this time is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Further, instead of the in-interval flag stored in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, the ending in-ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the jackpot game in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the ending effect according to the jackpot game this time is performed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current ending is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the ending is in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-20, and if the ending is not in progress, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-20 whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated, and if the ending time has elapsed, the special figure special electric processing data is used to move the process to the jackpot game end process in step S340-21. Set to "5" to end the jackpot game process this time.

(Small hit game processing of the main control board)
A small hit game process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a small hit game end process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S350-1 whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set by the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is "0" or more. If it is in the opening, the process is transferred to step S350-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process is transferred to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop process has elapsed. When the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, the opening / closing gaming flag indicating that the opening / closing game for opening / closing the large winning opening is in progress is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the opening time has elapsed. If not, the small hit game process is terminated.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening / closing game of the big winning opening is in progress. If the opening / closing game is in progress, the process is transferred to step S350-5, and if the opening / closing game is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening condition of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening or interval of the small hit game has ended. If the opening condition of the large winning opening is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S350-6, and if the opening condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied, the processing is transferred to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs the large winning opening opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, the type of the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50 or the 2nd large winning opening 56) released from the control data of the small hit game shown in FIG. 10 (c) and the current large winning opening ( The opening time of the 1st big winning opening 50 or the 2nd big winning opening 56) is specified, and the opening time of the big winning opening and the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid (1st big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing solenoid) The drive data of 57b) is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening will be converted to the open state.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S350-7 whether or not the opening condition of the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening timing of the specific region 53 specified by the control data of the specific region shown in FIG. 10 (c) has been reached (here, the opening timing of the large winning opening). If the opening condition of the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S350-8, and if the opening condition of the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs the specific area opening process in step S350-8. Specifically, the drive data of the specific area opening / closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted into the open state.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S350-9 whether or not the closing condition of the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the closing timing of the specific region 53 specified by the control data of the specific region shown in FIG. 10C (here, the closing timing of the large winning opening) has been reached. If the closing condition of the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S350-10, and if the closing condition of the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs the specific area closing process in step S350-10. Specifically, the drive data of the specific area opening / closing solenoid 53b set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted into the closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has elapsed and whether or not the number of winnings in the large winning opening has reached the maximum number of winnings. If the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S350-12, and if the closing condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied, the processing is transferred to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs the large winning opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) is specified from the control data of the small hit game shown in FIG. 10 (c), the interval time of the big winning opening is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the main Clear the drive data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid set in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final interval time in the small hit game has elapsed. When the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the open / close gaming flag set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared, and when the final interval time has not elapsed, the open / close gaming flag is cleared. This small hit game process is completed.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned specific area passage flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the specific area passage flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S350-16 assuming that the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the opening / closing game to execute the jackpot game, and the specific area passage flag is saved. If not, the process is transferred to step S350-19 assuming that the ending is executed because the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the opening / closing game.

The main CPU 110a clears the specific area passage flag saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S350-16, and performs the jackpot game transition process in step S350-17. Specifically, the control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of winnings,) according to the stop special figure data (stopped special symbol) from the big winning opening control data determination table for the big hit game shown in FIG. 10A. (Opening time, etc.) is selected, and processing such as clearing the time saving flag and various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is performed.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets "3" in the special figure special electric processing data in order to shift the processing to the big hit game processing, and ends the small hit game processing this time.

The main CPU 110a performs the ending transition process in step S350-19. Specifically, the ending time of this time is specified from the control data of the small hit game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the small hit game in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small hit game process. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the game ball is placed in the specific area 53 during the ending effect (during the small hit game, more specifically during the opening / closing game) according to the small hit game this time. A process for executing a regrettable notification effect for notifying that the command has not been passed is performed.

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current ending is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 is "0" or more. If the ending is in progress, the process is transferred to step S350-22, and if the ending is not in progress, the small hit game process is terminated.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the small hit game process this time is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, the special figure special electric train is used to move the process to the special symbol memory determination process. After setting "0" in the processing data, the small hit game processing this time is ended.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small hit game, the small hit game (conversion game) is completed (10 times opening of the first large winning opening or winning of 10 game balls). Until then, the jackpot game will not be executed. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 does not put the player at a disadvantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed without ending the small hit game. Therefore, the period from the small hit game to the big hit game is not extended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The big hit game may be executed after the ending of the small hit game is performed.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop special figure data saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, whether or not the stop special figure data is a jackpot special symbol. Is determined. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S360-3, and if it is not a big hit special symbol (it is a small hit special symbol), the process is transferred to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the big hit winning game state information saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, after the big hit game based on the big hit winning game state information. The first game state setting table (see FIG. 33 (a)) for setting the game state of the above is selected, and the process is transferred to step S360-7. The details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires game state information when passing through a specific area saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, hits based on the game state information when passing through a specific area. A second game state setting table (see FIG. 33 (b)) for setting the game state after the game is selected, and the process is transferred to step S360-7. The details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

The main CPU 110a collates the acquired game state information and the like with the selected game state setting table in step S360-7, and sets the game state flag, the number of time reductions (J1 to J3), and the small number of times (J1 to J3) as the game state after the big hit game. The remaining number of hits (Z) is determined and set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, the game state designation command corresponding to the game state flag is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 performs a process for updating the game state.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special symbol special electric processing data in order to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

In this way, at the end of the big hit game executed by the game ball passing through the specific area 53 during the small hit game, based on the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game. Predetermined processing (specifically, a process of determining a game condition (game state, number of time reductions, number of remaining small hits) after a big hit game, and setting the determined game condition in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. ) Can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform game control (setting of game conditions) by utilizing the events that occur in the actual game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of the big hit game that does not go through the small hit game, a predetermined process (specifically, the game condition after the big hit game (game state, number of time reductions, small) is determined based on the game state when the big hit is determined. It is possible to determine the number of remaining hits) and to set the determined game conditions in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c). Therefore, the game characteristics can be different depending on whether the game is a big hit game that goes through a small hit game or a big hit game that does not go through a small hit game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

At the end of the big hit game that does not go through the small hit game, the predetermined processing is not performed based on the game state when the big hit is determined, but based on the game state when the big hit special symbol is stopped and displayed. A predetermined process may be performed.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram showing a first game state setting table for setting a game state after the end of the big hit game without going through the small hit, and FIG. 33 (b) is a diagram showing the game via the small hit game. It is a figure which shows the 2nd game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of a big hit game.

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), in the first game state setting table, the stop special figure data of the big hit special symbol, the game state information at the time of the big hit winning, and the game state to be set are set. A flag (a time saving flag indicating that the time saving game state is set), a first time saving number (J1) which is the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol for ending the time saving game state, and a second special for ending the time saving game state. The second time reduction number (J2), which is the number of times of variation display of the symbol, and the third time reduction number (J3), which is the total number of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that terminates the time reduction game state. The remaining number of small hits (Z), which is the number of small hit variation displays for ending the time-saving game state, is associated with.

As shown in FIG. 33 (b), in the second game state setting table, the stop special figure data of the small hit special symbol and the game state at the time of passing through the specific area showing the game state at the time of passing the specific area 53 of the game ball are displayed. Information, a game status flag to be set (a time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction game state is set), a first time reduction number (J1) which is the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol for ending the time reduction game state, and a time reduction. The second time reduction number (J2), which is the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol that ends the game state, and the number of times of variation display of the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that ends the time reduction game state. The 3 time reduction number of times (J3) and the small hit remaining number of times (Z), which is the number of times of the small hit variation display for ending the time reduction game state, are associated with each other.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that it is set when the game is executed in the time-saving game state rather than the second time-saving number (J2) set when the game state is executed in the normal game state. One point is that there are big hit games (first big hit game, third big hit game) in which the number of second time reductions (J2) is larger. By doing so, it is possible to make the second time reduction number (J2) set according to the type of the jackpot game different, and it is possible to improve the playability and the interest of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is the second time reduction number (J2) set when the game is executed in the normal game state, and the second time reduction number (J2) set when the game state is executed in the time reduction game state. There is a jackpot game (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) that has the same number of 2 time reductions (J2), and the 2nd time reduction number (J2) of the jackpot game is another jackpot game (1st). There is a point that it is larger than the second time reduction number (J2) of 1 big hit game, 3 big hit game). By doing so, the value of the jackpot game can be different depending on the number of time reductions, not the difference due to the prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the playability and the interest of the game. Will be.

The third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that it is set when the game is executed in a shorter game state than the remaining number of small hits (Z) set when the game is executed in the normal game state. There is a big hit game (first big hit game, second big hit game, third big hit game) in which the remaining number of small hits (Z) is larger. By doing so, the remaining number of small hits (Z) set depending on the type of the big hit game can be made different, and the playability can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

The fourth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is the remaining number of small hits (Z) set when the game is executed in the normal game state, and the small number set when the game state is executed in the short game state. There is a big hit game (4th big hit game, 5th big hit game) in which the remaining number of hits (Z) is the same, and in the normal game state, the remaining number of small hits (Z) of the big hit game is another big hit game (No. There is a point that it is larger than the remaining number of small hits (Z) of 1 big hit game, 2nd big hit game, and 3rd big hit game). By doing so, the value of the big hit game can be different depending on the number of remaining small hits, not the difference due to the prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game, and the playability is improved and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

The fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that the large hit game executed via the small hit game has a second time reduction number (J2) set when the game is executed in the normal game state. There is a big hit game (1st V big hit game, 3V big hit game) in which the second time saving number (J2) set when executed in the time saving game state is larger than that. By doing so, it is possible to make the second time reduction number (J2) set according to the type of the big hit game via the small hit game different, and it is possible to improve the playability and the interest of the game. Will be.

The sixth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that the big hit game executed via the small hit game is based on the remaining number of small hits (Z) set when the game is executed in the normal game state. However, there is a point that the remaining number of small hits (Z) set when the game is executed in the short-time game state is larger. By doing so, it is possible to make the value of the big hit game via the small hit game different depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the playability and improve the interest of the game.

(Game state referred to at the end of the big hit game that does not go through the small hit game)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of the big hit game that does not go through the small hit game, and FIG. 34 (a) is a timing chart when the big hit variation display is executed in the normal game state. 34 (b) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final fluctuation), and FIG. 34 (c) shows the jackpot fluctuation display in the time-saving gaming state (final fluctuation). It is a timing chart when it is executed.

Regarding the game state referred to for setting the game conditions (game state, number of time reductions, number of remaining small hits) at the end of the big hit game that does not go through the small hit game, the timing determined as a big hit by the big hit judgment (when the big hit is won). ).

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the normal game state, the jackpot variation display of T1 starts at the end of the jackpot game of T4, that is, the timing at which the jackpot is won. The game conditions (game state, various time reduction times, remaining number of small hits) are set with reference to the game state in. In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final variation), at the end of the jackpot game of T4, at the start of the jackpot variation display of T1, that is, The game conditions (game state, various time reductions, remaining number of small hits) are set with reference to the game state at the timing when the big hit is won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving game state (final variation), at the end of the jackpot game of T4, at the start of the jackpot variation display of T1, that is, the jackpot. The game conditions (game state, various time reductions, remaining number of small hits) are set with reference to the game state at the timing of winning. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referred to at the end of the big hit game via the small hit game)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of the big hit game via the small hit game, and FIG. 35 (a) is a timing chart when the small hit variation display is executed in the normal game state. 35 (b) is a timing chart when the small hit variation display that does not satisfy the time reduction end condition is executed in the time reduction game state, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the time reduction end condition that is satisfied in the time reduction game state. It is a timing chart when the small hit fluctuation display to be made is executed.

Regarding the game state referred to for setting the game conditions (game state, time reduction number, small hit remaining number) at the end of the big hit game via the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small hit game. It is the timing when it is done (at the time of transition to the jackpot game).

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the small hit variation display is executed in the normal game state, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small hit game of T4 at the end of the big hit game of T6. The game condition (game state, various time reduction times, remaining number of small hits) is set with reference to the game state at the time of playing. In this case, since the game has been in the normal game state since the start of the small hit variation display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the small hit variation display that does not satisfy the time saving end condition is executed in the time saving game state, the game ball during the small hit game of T4 at the end of the big hit game of T6. The game condition (game state, various time reductions, remaining number of small hits) is set with reference to the game state when the player passes through the specific area 53. In this case, the timing of T4 is called the time-saving game state because the time-saving game state is maintained without the various time-saving times and the remaining number of small hits being "0" when the stop display of the small hit variation display of T2 is displayed. It will be. When the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the big hit game is started and the game shifts to the normal game state, but when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, it is called a time-saving game state before shifting to the normal game state. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 35 (c), when the small hit variation display that satisfies the time saving end condition is executed in the time saving game state, the game ball during the small hit game of T4 at the end of the big hit game of T6. The game condition (game state, various time reductions, remaining number of small hits) is set with reference to the game state when the player passes through the specific area 53. In this case, when the small hit variation display of T2 is stopped and displayed, any of the time reduction times becomes "0", the time reduction game state ends, and the game shifts to the normal game state. Therefore, the timing of T4 is called the normal game state. It will be.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, there are cases where the jackpot variation display is executed and the jackpot game is executed, and cases where the small hit variation display is executed and the jackpot game is executed, and at the end of the jackpot game. The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state referred to for setting the game condition (game state, various time reduction times, small hit remaining number) is different. Therefore, the playability can be different depending on whether the hit is a big hit or a small hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Mode flow showing the transition of the game mode)
FIG. 36A is a mode flow when the jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 36B is the mode flow in which the jackpot game is executed in the rush battle mode or the random dance mode (normal time saving game state). FIG. 36 (c) is a mode flow in which a jackpot game is executed in a super-random dance mode or an infinite mode (normal time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the normal gaming state, when the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, three rounds are made. The first big hit game consisting of the game is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to one.
Further, when the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the second jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second jackpot game is executed. The 2 hour reduction number (J2) is set to 95, and the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to 1.
Further, when the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the third jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the third jackpot game is executed. The 2 hour reduction number (J2) is set to 7 times, and the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to 1.

Further, when the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, the fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the fourth jackpot game is executed. The number of time reductions (J2) is set to 496, and the mode shifts to the infinite mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to 2.
Further, when the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the fifth jackpot game is executed. The number of time reductions (J2) is set to 496, and the mode shifts to the infinite mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to 2.

Further, when the small hit special symbol 13 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the first V big hit game consisting of three round games is executed, and then. The second time reduction number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to 1.
Further, when the small hit special symbol 14 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the second V big hit game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the second V big hit game is executed. In addition to setting the second time reduction number (J2) to 95 times, the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to 1.
Further, when the small hit special symbol 15 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the third V big hit game consisting of three round games is executed, and then. The second time reduction number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to 1.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the rush battle mode or the random dance mode (normal time-shortened game state) in which the remaining number of small hits is one, the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot (first result). ) And the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small hits (as it is once), and then the first jackpot game is executed. The 2 time reduction number (J2) is set to 95, and the mode shifts to the super-random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2.
Further, when the jackpot special symbol 02 is determined to be a jackpot (first result) in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (as it is once) three times. The first big hit game consisting of the round games of is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times. do.
Further, when the jackpot special symbol 03 is determined to be a jackpot (first result) in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (as it is once) three times. The first big hit game consisting of the round games of is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times. do.

Further, when the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (as it is once) 10 times. The fourth big hit game consisting of the round games of is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 496 times, and the mode shifts to the infinite mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to two times.
Further, when the jackpot special symbol 12 is determined to be a jackpot (first result) in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (as it is once) 10 times. The fifth big hit game consisting of the round games of is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 496 times, and the mode shifts to the infinite mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to two times.

Further, when the small hit special symbol 13 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 0 to enter the normal gaming state. The first V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to one.
Further, when the small hit special symbol 14 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 0 and the game is in the normal gaming state. The second V big hit game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to 1.
Further, when the small hit special symbol 15 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 0 and the game is in the normal gaming state. The third V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the mode shifts to the random dance mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to one.

As shown in FIG. 36 (c), in the super-random dance mode or the infinite mode (normal time-shortened game state) in which the remaining number of small hits is two, the big hit determination according to the first special is the big hit (first result). When the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small hits (while remaining two times), and then the second jackpot game is executed. The time reduction number (J2) is set to 95, and the mode shifts to the super-random dance mode in which the small hit remaining number (Z) is set to 2.
Further, when the jackpot special symbol 02 is determined to be a jackpot (first result) in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (as it is 2 times) 3 times. The second big hit game consisting of the round game of is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times. do.
Further, when the jackpot special symbol 03 is determined to be a jackpot (first result) in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (as it is 2 times) 3 times. The third big hit game consisting of the round game of is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times. do.

In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (as it is 2 times) 10 times. The fourth big hit game consisting of the round games of is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 496 times, and the mode shifts to the infinite mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to two times.
Further, when the jackpot special symbol 12 is determined to be a jackpot (first result) in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (as it is 2 times) 10 times. The fifth big hit game consisting of the round games of is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 496 times, and the mode shifts to the infinite mode in which the remaining number of small hits is set to two times.

Further, when the small hit special symbol 13 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1, but the normal time saving game state is changed. The first V jackpot game, which is maintained and consists of three round games, is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to two times. Move to.
Further, when the small hit special symbol 14 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1, but the normal time saving game state is changed. The second V jackpot game, which is maintained and consists of 10 round games, is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to 2 times. Move to.
Further, when the small hit special symbol 15 is determined to be a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1, but the normal time saving game state is changed. The 3rd V jackpot game, which is maintained and consists of 3 round games, is executed, and then the second time reduction number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to 2 times. Move to.

In this way, when the third big hit game (corresponding to the first special game) is executed as a result of the big hit determination related to the first special symbol in the normal game state, the second time reduction number (J2) is seven times. The first jackpot game or the second jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game), which is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state (corresponding to the first specific gaming state) and is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game. When executed, the second time saving number (J2) is controlled to the normal time saving gaming state (corresponding to the second specific gaming state) set to 55 times or 95 times, which is more than 7 times. There is. Therefore, the degree of advantage to the player can be different depending on the type of the executed jackpot game (the jackpot special symbol displayed as stopped), and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the result of the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol is a jackpot (first result), the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) can be executed, and the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol is possible. When the result of is a small hit (second result), it is possible to execute the second V big hit game (corresponding to the second special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the third big hit game, and is related to the second special symbol. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (first result), the fourth jackpot game or the fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game, can be executed. There is. Therefore, the type of the jackpot game can be different depending on the type of the special symbol and the type of the determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a random dance mode or a super random dance mode (specific game) controlled after the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the third big hit game (corresponding to the first special game), is executed. State: In the normal time saving game state), when it is determined as a big hit (first result) as a result of the big hit determination related to the second special symbol, the fourth big hit game or the fourth big hit game which is more advantageous to the player than the second V big hit game. When 5 big hit games (corresponding to the 3rd special game) can be executed and a small hit (2nd result) is determined as a result of the big hit determination related to the 2nd special symbol, the 2nd V big hit game (2nd special) (Equivalent to a game) can be executed. Therefore, even when the jackpot determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of the jackpot game to be executed can be different depending on the type of the determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, the 4th jackpot game or the 5th jackpot game (corresponding to the 1st special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the 2V jackpot game (corresponding to the 2nd special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the 3rd jackpot game (corresponding to the 1st special game). In the infinite mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state) controlled after the execution of the third special game (corresponding to the third special game), it was determined as a big hit (first result) as a result of the big hit determination related to the second special symbol. In this case, when the 4th big hit game or the 5th big hit game (corresponding to the 3rd special game) can be executed and it is determined as a small hit (2nd result) as a result of the big hit determination related to the 2nd special symbol. , The 2nd V jackpot game (corresponding to the 2nd special game) can be executed. Therefore, even when the jackpot determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of the jackpot game to be executed can be different depending on the type of the determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, in the state of the rush battle mode or the random dance mode (normal time reduction game state), if the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and the jackpot game is executed, the game condition (second time reduction) is executed. The number of times, the number of remaining small hits, the production mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the jackpot game in the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the state of the rush battle mode (normal time reduction game state), the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and the passing of the game ball to the specific area 53 during the small hit game is a condition. When the big hit game is executed, the game conditions (second time reduction number, small hit remaining number, production mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the small hit game in the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and the jackpot game is executed in the state of the super-random dance mode (normal time reduction game state), and the small hit special symbol as the second special symbol is executed. Is stopped and displayed, and when a big hit game is executed on condition that the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the hit game, the game conditions (second time reduction number, small hit remaining number, effect mode, etc.) are set. It is designed to be maintained without being ranked down. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is discouraged by the big hit or the small hit in the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in any game mode (normal game state, normal time reduction game state), if the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol and the jackpot game is executed, the game condition (second time reduction) is executed. The number of times, the number of remaining small hits, the production mode, etc.) are set to the highest rank in the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the value of the jackpot in the second special symbol can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the big hit special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol and the big hit game is executed, the game conditions (second time reduction number, small hit remaining number, production mode, etc.) are set to the maximum regardless of the type of the big hit game. For example, when the 4th jackpot special game is executed, the game condition is set to the super-random dance mode, and when the 5th jackpot special game is executed, the game condition is set to the infinite mode. You may try to do it. In this case, the rate at which the fifth jackpot special game is executed may be higher than the rate at which the fourth jackpot special game is executed, or vice versa.

(Public diagram of the main control board)
With reference to FIG. 37, a general-purpose electric control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the fuzu-fuden processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded fuzu-fuden processing data, and performs processing corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute and end the current Fuzu Fuden control process.

Specifically, if the fuzu-fuden processing data = 0, the processing for executing the variable display of the normal symbol based on the hold storage (fuzu-judgment information) and the fuzu-fuden processing data are set to "1". The normal symbol variation process (step S410) for performing the process of changing to is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation processing will be described later.

If the Fuzu Fuden processing data = 1, to execute an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 47 in a predetermined manner, or to change the Fuzu Fuden processing data to "0". Auxiliary game processing (step S420) is executed.

(Ordinary symbol fluctuation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is being performed. If the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-12, and if the variation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol hold number (G) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved symbols (G) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S410-3, and if the number of reserved ordinary symbols (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the normal symbol hold number (G) and updates it, and in step S410-4, shifts the data stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. The normal map determination information stored in the 1st storage unit to the 4th storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the normal map determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the normal map determination information reservation storage area. Further, the normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal map determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the normal map determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The normal map judgment information used in the previous game is deleted.

The main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, using the hit determination table for ordinary symbols (see FIG. 39 (a)), it is determined whether or not the hit is based on the game state and the hit determination random value stored in the normal figure execution storage area. decide. The details of the hit determination table for ordinary symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process in step S410-6. Specifically, using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 39 (b)), the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the normal symbol determination random value. Decide the stop symbol data of the symbol. The details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the stop normal map data.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a performs a normal map fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, using the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 39 (c)), the normal symbol can be displayed in a variable manner based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the normal map fluctuation pattern random value. Determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time). The details of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the normal map variation pattern can be grasped on the effect control board 130.

The main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S410-10, and is normal in step S410-11. The symbol variation display is started, and the normal symbol variation processing this time is completed. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variation display of the normal symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and is output by the output control process of the step S800, so that the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display 62. Will be displayed in a variable manner.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped in step S410-13, and the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped in step S410-14. , Ordinary symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed on the effect control board 130.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped-displayed normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (winning). If it is not a hit normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is a hit normal symbol, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 39 (d)) in step S410-16. Acquire auxiliary game control data for the purpose. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command according to the type of the auxiliary game in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game has been started on the effect control board 130.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in 410-16 of the auxiliary game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, the normal electric processing is performed. "1" is set in the data, and the normal symbol change processing this time is completed.

(Collision detection table for ordinary symbols)
FIG. 39 (a) is a hit determination table for a normal symbol referred to when a hit determination is made based on the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), in the hit determination table for ordinary symbols, the game state at the time of performing the hit determination, the random value for the hit determination, and the determination result (hit, loss) of the hit determination correspond. It is attached, and the approximate winning probability is described in the rightmost column for reference.

"Hit" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will be executed, and "missing" is a determination result that the auxiliary game is not executed. In the collision detection, only the loss is set and no special loss (time reduction) is set.

The first feature of the collision determination table for the normal symbol shown in FIG. 39 (a) is that the gaming state is a non-time saving state (normal gaming state) or a time saving state (time saving gaming state (normal time saving gaming state, special). There is a point that the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a hit is the same regardless of the time-saving game state). By doing so, it is expected that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the game state. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The second feature of the hit determination table for ordinary symbols shown in FIG. 39 (a) is that the hit probability does not change depending on the set value and is constant. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a hit in the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state may be higher than in the non-time-saving state (normal game state) (causing a probability change in the normal figure). In this case, the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a hit in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state may be the same, or the special time-saving game state is better than the normal time-saving game state. The probability (ratio) of being determined may be higher, or the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a hit may be higher in the normal time-saving gaming state than in the special time-saving gaming state.

(Ordinary symbol judgment table)
FIG. 39B is a normal symbol determination table referred to when determining a stop symbol of a normal symbol based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the normal symbol judgment table, the game state at the time of judgment, the judgment result of hit judgment (hit, loss), the random value for hit symbol judgment, and the normal symbol judgment are displayed. The determination result, the stop normal symbol data indicating the determination result, and the ordinary symbol designation command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a lost normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" is a normal symbol when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened once is executed.
The normal symbol "2" is a normal symbol when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened twice is executed.

The first feature of the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 39 (b) is that two types of ordinary symbols are set to execute an auxiliary game in which the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened is different. Be done. By doing so, the playability of the auxiliary game can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second feature of the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 39 (b) is that the selection ratio of ordinary symbols does not change depending on the set value and is constant. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Public map fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 39 (c) is a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation pattern of a normal symbol based on the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of a game ball to the normal map gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table, the game state at the time of judgment, the judgment result of the hit judgment, the normal figure fluctuation pattern random value, and the judgment of the normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment The resulting fluctuation time and the normal map fluctuation pattern specification command indicating this determination result are associated with each other.

The first feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (c) is that a relatively long fluctuation time is determined in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), whereas various time saving gaming states (normal game state) are determined. In the time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state), a relatively short fluctuation time is determined, that is, a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. By doing so, it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 47 in various time-saving game states than in the non-time-saving state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (c) is that the selection ratio of each normal map fluctuation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the fluctuation pattern of the normal map, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 39 (d) is an auxiliary game control table used for controlling the auxiliary game based on the type of the hit normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 39 (d), the auxiliary game control table includes the game state when the auxiliary game is generated, the stop normal map data, the number of times the second start port 47 is opened, and the opening time of the auxiliary game. , The first opening time of the second starting port 47, the interval time between opening, the second opening time of the second starting port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 39 (d) is that various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special) are performed as compared with the case where the auxiliary game is executed in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state). The point that the opening time of the second starting port 47 is longer when the auxiliary game is executed in the time-saving game state) can be mentioned. By doing so, it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 47 in various time-saving game states than in the non-time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 39 (d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 is opened, the second start). There is no difference in the time value when the mouth 47 opens. By doing so, the player becomes advantageous regardless of the time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the special time-saving game state is set to occur during the normal time-saving game state, the performance of the front and rear time-saving states is the same, so complicated control is not required and a pure time-saving number of times is added. It becomes possible to do.

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 39 (d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened, and the time value at which the second starting port 47 is opened. ) Is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the progress of the auxiliary game, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

It should be noted that, depending on whether the game is in the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state, at least one of the performances of the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened, and the time value that the second starting port 47 is opened). One) may be different.

Further, depending on whether the game is in the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state, at least one of the performances of the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened, and the time value that the second starting port 47 is opened). If the special time-saving game states overlap during the normal time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game in the normal time-saving game state may be inherited in the special time-saving game state.

(External information data creation process of the main control board)
The external information data creation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the external information data creation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S720-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. If there is no winning, the process is transferred to step S720-3, and if there is a winning, the external information data of the starting opening winning signal indicating that the game ball has won in the starting opening is input in step S720-2. It is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-3 whether or not the variation display of the special symbol has stopped. If the fluctuation display is not stopped (either during the fluctuation display, waiting for customers, or during the jackpot game), the process is transferred to step S720-5, and if the fluctuation display is stopped, step S720 is performed. In -4, the external information data of the symbol confirmation signal indicating that the variation display of the special symbol has stopped is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-5 whether or not the jackpot game has started. If the jackpot game has not started, the process is transferred to step S720-7, and if the jackpot game is started, in step S720-6, the outside of the special game signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. The information data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-7 whether or not the jackpot game is completed. If the jackpot game is not completed, the process is transferred to step S720-9, and if the jackpot game is completed, the special game set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c in step S720-8. Clear the external information data of the signal.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-9 whether or not an advantageous state (including a jackpot game and a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state has been started. If the advantageous state has not started, the process is transferred to step S720-11, and if the advantageous state has started, in step S720-10, the advantageous state signal indicating that the advantageous state is in progress is transmitted to the main RAM 110c. Set in the external information data output area of.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-11 whether or not the advantageous state has ended. If the advantageous state has not ended, the process is transferred to step S720-13, and if the advantageous state ends, the advantageous state set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c in step S720-12. Clear the external information data of the signal.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-13 whether or not the frame opening that the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 opens is started. If the frame opening has not been started, the process is transferred to step S720-15, and if the frame opening is started, the external information of the frame opening signal indicating that the frame opening is being performed in step S720-14. The data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-15 whether or not the frame opening is completed (the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are closed). If the frame opening has not been completed, the process is transferred to step S720-17, and if the frame opening is completed, the frame opening set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c in step S720-16 is completed. Clear the external information data of the signal.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-17 whether or not an RWM clear or a security error (various abnormalities) has occurred. If no RWM clear or security error has occurred, the process is transferred to step S720-19, and if an RWM clear or security error has occurred, an RWM clear or security error has occurred in step S720-18. The external information data of the security signal indicating the above is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the conditions for paying out prize balls of a predetermined unit (here, 10 pieces) are satisfied. If the payout condition is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S720-21, and if the payout condition is not satisfied, in step S720-20, the payout condition of the prize ball of the predetermined unit is satisfied. The external information data of the prize ball scheduled signal shown is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the payout of the prize balls of a predetermined unit (here, 10 pieces) is completed. If the payout of the prize balls is not completed, the external information data creation process is completed this time, and if the payout of the prize balls is completed, the payout of the prize balls in a predetermined unit is completed in step S720-22. The external information data of the prize ball payout signal indicating that the prize has been paid out is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c, and the current external information data creation process is completed.

The various external information data set in the external information data output area are output to the outside of the game machine 1 as game information from various terminals of the game information output terminal board by the output control process of step S750 described above. Become.

(Explanation of various signals output as game information)
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the types of various signals output as game information from the various output terminals of the game information output terminal board 90, the output timings of the various signals, and the output periods of the various signals.

From the first terminal, a start opening winning signal is output for 100 ms when the game ball is won to the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47.
From the second terminal, a symbol confirmation signal is output for 500 ms when the stop display of the special symbol is displayed.
From the third terminal, a special game signal is output from the start of the big hit game to the continuation of the big hit game.
From the fourth terminal, the advantageous state signal is output from the start of the advantageous state to the continuation of the advantageous state.

From the fifth terminal, a frame opening signal is output from the time when the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is detected to the continuous opening.
From the sixth terminal, a security signal is output for 200 ms from the time of occurrence of various abnormalities (RWM clear, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, payout abnormality).
From the 7th terminal, a payout schedule signal is output for 100 ms from the time when the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is determined.
From the eighth terminal, a payout completion signal is output for 100 ms from the time when the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is completed.

In this way, since the game information is output to the outside of the game machine 1 via the game information output terminal board 90, the operating state of the game machine 1 is monitored and performed by an information collecting device such as a hall computer. It becomes possible to perform analysis and the like.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays a display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the process is transferred to step S850-2 to switch the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S850-2. , The process is transferred to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not switched. When this process is first executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmation flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S850-4 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information is displayed. The process is transferred to step S850-3 to confirm the lighting of the device 113. When this process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step S850-3, the main CPU 110a displays for lighting confirmation for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage is performed. The normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data is selected. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a displays information based on the interval counter value, the number of normal medium outs indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value with reference to a display data determination table (not shown). The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in step S850-6 in the output data area of the information RWM area as the display information of the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control process of step S880 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. Will be done. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

In step S850-7, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned display switching time counter, and in step S850-8, determines whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process is transferred to step S850-15. If it is larger than the upper limit value, the information display 113 is displayed. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process is transferred to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S850-11. ..

In step S850-12, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned data selection counter, and in step S85-13, determines whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c by the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S850-16, the main RAM 110c is used for the information of the main RAM 110c by the above-mentioned game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is returned, and the performance display data setting process this time is terminated.

In this way, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order, which segment is out of order, and the like.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 is displayed. Performance information (usually base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the table of display information of FIG. 43, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2.", Which indicates that the game section is the normal base value two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that the game section is the normal base value three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of normal outs is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value are There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical seg does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal times, but the identification information displayed in the identification seg is the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the three 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which does not reach a sufficient quantity for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed in the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it is easy to understand that the normally displayed base value is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The process may be executed within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50, and the second large winning opening 56 by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting the out ball composed of the game balls that have flowed into the out ball, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. In that case, the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first major winning opening detection switch 50a, the second major winning opening detection switch. Every time the game ball is detected by 56a, the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) may be added by one.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the setting.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, specific area 53, second large winning opening 56) (difficulty of entering the ball), etc. Various drives for operating movable bodies (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member 52, second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 69 (No. 1) 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is displayed. The set value displayed on the 7-segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. When the predetermined period elapses, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after checking the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is confirmed.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, specific area 53, second large winning opening 56) (difficulty of entering the ball), etc. Various drives for operating movable bodies (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member 52, second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 69 (No. 1) 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting confirmation notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

The specific examples from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 are the same as the specific examples from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 in the specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change shown in FIG. 49. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

In this way, in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member) that affects the result of the game. 52, various drive sources for operating the second prize opening opening / closing member 57) (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid) Since 57b) is initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (including the case where only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the gaming store (only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500). At the time of (including replacement of only), it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main information display 69 (first) excluding the state confirmation display 68. Special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66 Since the right-handed display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. Is possible.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. It is possible to notify the operator (worker, game shop clerk) who confirms the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is the timing to confirm the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

In addition, even in the state before the start of the game progress control, various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) is completed are provided. Since the initial operation is performed, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while changing the setting (checking the setting), and it is possible to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, since the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started after the operation standby time has passed after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) is completed. It is possible to allow time from the completion of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and the operation confirmation can be performed appropriately.

In addition, the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is after the end of the setting change mode or after the end of the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the initial operation notification, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation. ..

In addition, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, and the game is performed in the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the above is performed, it is possible to confirm the two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the second large winning opening are opened. Since the opening signal is not output in spite of this, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110 and to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the turning on the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game. Therefore, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started, the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the game is present, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed, so that the current setting value is not displayed. Can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

In addition, since the information display 113 does not display the set value or the performance information of the gaming machine during the initial operation of various drive sources, the employee of the game store can check the initial operation of various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the above and to accurately judge the failure of various drive sources.

After the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting, but after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 using FIG. 46. The motions at the motion timing (initial motion, jackpot game motion, small hit game motion, auxiliary game motion in the normal gaming state, auxiliary game motion in the time-saving gaming state) are compared.

The number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state and during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

The one-time drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is longer in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the total drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is shorter in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b.

The one-time drive time of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is longer in the initial operation than in the small hit game operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is shorter in the initial operation than in the small hit game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b.

The number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven is larger during the initial operation than during the small hit game operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b is shorter in the initial operation than in the small hit game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

The total drive time of the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b is shorter in the initial operation than in the jackpot game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b.

It should be noted that at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and one drive time. , The value may be the same as or almost the same (similar) as the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and one drive time. , The value may be smaller than the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , The value may be the same as or almost the same (similar) as the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , The value may be larger than the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , It may be a value smaller than the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b.

Further, at least one of the number of times the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is the number of times the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is driven during the small hit game operation. The value may be the same as or almost the same (similar) as the one drive time and the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, at least one of the number of drives and the total drive time of the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation is larger than the number of driving times and the total driving time of the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b during the small hit game operation. It may be a large value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, at least one of the number of drives and the total drive time of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation is smaller than the one driving time of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b during the small hit game operation. It may be a value. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b.

Further, at least one of the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set as the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the small hit game operation, and one drive time. , The value may be the same as or almost the same (similar) as the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, at least one of the one-time drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b in the initial operation is larger than the one-time drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b in the small hit game operation. It may be a large value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the small hit game operation. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is the total drive time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). It may be the same value as the drive time or a value almost the same (similar). By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is larger than the one drive time and the total drive time during the jackpot game operation. It may be a value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

(First modification)
Hereinafter, the first modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. In the first modification, the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, and the drive source initial operation process is performed during the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process. Since the RWM is cleared during the execution of the change process, it is different from the first embodiment. Therefore, only the difference from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting process of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 8 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) a set value (probability of being determined as a jackpot in a jackpot determination), which is a stage of the degree of advantage of the game, and the above-mentioned process. The drive source initial operation process (game program) is performed, and the process is transferred to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, the process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the area other than the set value area of the game RWM area) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, and the above-mentioned drive source initial operation process. (Game program) is performed, and the process is transferred to step S26. The details of the RWM clearing process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and the above-mentioned drive source initial operation process are performed, and step S30. Move the process to.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board is subjected to the process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear preparation screen for the image display device to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or to notify the voice output device 9 that "press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output voice over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. The path switching solenoid 52b and the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are subjected to processing for initial operation until the RWM clear preparation mode is completed. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24-3 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is moved to step S24-4 assuming that the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, step S24-2 is performed. Move the process.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-5. Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a transmits a RWM clear designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 will perform the process for terminating the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear process.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, specific area 53, second large winning opening 56) (difficulty of entering the ball), etc. Various drives for operating movable bodies (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member 52, second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 69 (No. 1) 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the RWM clear is being prepared is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "solenoid operation are confirmed" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources. "Please do" (alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

In this way, in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member) that affects the result of the game. 52, various drive sources for operating the second prize opening opening / closing member 57) (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid) Since 57b) is initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (including the case where only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the gaming store (only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500). At the time of (including replacement of only), it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main information display 69 (first) excluding the state confirmation display 68. Special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66 Since the right-handed display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. Is possible.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the setting is being changed and the setting change notification (setting) for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Since the confirmation is being performed and the setting confirmation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources) is performed, the operation of the gaming machine 1 is confirmed at the timing for confirming the operation of various drive sources. It is possible to inform the workers (workers, game shop staff) and have them check the operation appropriately.

In addition, since various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), the start before the progress control of the game is started. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the previous state, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, when the set value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Therefore, the initial operation of the various drive sources is no longer performed in the game-enabled state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, and the game is performed in the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the above is performed, it is possible to confirm the two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation. ..

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the second large winning opening are opened. Since the opening signal is not output in spite of this, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110 and to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the turning on the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game. Therefore, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started, the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the game is present, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed, so that the current setting value is not displayed. Can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

In addition, in the setting change notification in the setting change mode, the character "setting changing" was displayed. The setting changing screen was displayed, but in addition to the character "setting changing", various drive sources You may display the setting changing screen in which the characters "During initial operation of drive source" or "Please check the operation of the solenoid" are displayed to prompt the visual confirmation of the initial operation of.

(Operation comparison table)
Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 using FIG. 50. The motions at the motion timing (initial motion, jackpot game motion, small hit game motion, auxiliary game motion in the normal gaming state, auxiliary game motion in the time-saving gaming state) are compared.

The one-time drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is longer in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

The one-time drive time of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is longer in the initial operation than in the small hit game operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

It should be noted that the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be the same value as or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. .. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b in the initial operation may be the same value as or almost the same (similar) value as the one drive time in the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. .. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b in the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the one drive time in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation is set to the same value as the one driving time or the total driving time of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b during the small hit game operation. The values may be almost the same (similar). By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the one drive time of the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the one driving time of the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b during the small hit game operation. .. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b.

Further, the one drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation may be the same value as or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small hit game operation. .. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the one-time drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the one-time drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small hit game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, even if the one drive time of the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation is the same value as or almost the same (similar) value as the one drive time at the time of the big hit game operation (4R or 10R). good. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the one drive time of the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the one drive time at the time of the big hit game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
Hereinafter, the second modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 52. In the second modification, the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, the status confirmation indicator 68 is not provided, and the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Therefore, since it is different from the first embodiment, only the difference from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are waited for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S16 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S23 as a transition to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S18 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is transferred to step S23 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S18, and determines whether or not the checksum is normal in step S19. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S18 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process is moved to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the RWM clear preparation mode The process is transferred to step S23 as a transition to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to a process for executing a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure holdings, and also performs a process for displaying the first holding icon and the second holding icon on the image display device. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to the process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear preparation screen for the image display device to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or to notify the voice output device 9 that "press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output voice over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the process is transferred to step S25 as if the RWM clear is performed. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process of step S24 is repeated. ..

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are initially operated. Perform the process to make it. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, the game progress control is started by permitting all interrupts. , End the initial setting process this time.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, specific area 53, second large winning opening 56) (difficulty of entering the ball), etc. Various drives for operating movable bodies (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member 52, second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 69 (No. 1) 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed at the timing of T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

In this way, in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member) that affects the result of the game. 52, various drive sources for operating the second prize opening opening / closing member 57) (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid) Since 57b) is initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (including the case where only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the gaming store (only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500). At the time of (including replacement of only), it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, first). 2 Special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator 63, second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67) Is in the non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. It is possible to notify the operator (worker, game shop clerk) who confirms the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is the timing to confirm the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated after the RWM clear preparation mode is finished. Therefore, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, since the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started after the operation standby time has passed after the RWM clear preparation mode is completed, the RWM clear approval operation is performed. It is possible to have a time margin from the end of the operation to the operation check of various drive sources, and the operation check can be performed appropriately.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation. ..

In addition, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, and the game is performed in the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the above is performed, it is possible to confirm the two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the second large winning opening are opened. Since the opening signal is not output in spite of this, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110 and to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the turning on the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game. Therefore, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started, the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the game is present, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modification. The motion comparison at various motion timings (initial motion, jackpot game motion, small hit game motion, auxiliary game motion in the normal game state, auxiliary game motion in the time-saving game state) is the same as the motion comparison table shown in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

(Third modification example)
Hereinafter, the third modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 54. The third modification is different from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, and the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, which is different from the RWM. This is a second modification in that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modification shown in FIG. 51 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. The path switching solenoid 52b and the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are subjected to processing for initial operation until the RWM clear preparation mode is completed. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S25.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S25 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is transferred to step S26 as if the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources, and in step S27, the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized (cleared to 0). As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state), and the payout control board 120 and effect control. It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, specific area 53, second large winning opening 56) (difficulty of entering the ball), etc. Various drives for operating movable bodies (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member 52, second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 69 (No. 1) 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "solenoid operation are confirmed" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources. "Please do" (alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

In this way, in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member) that affects the result of the game. 52, various drive sources for operating the second prize opening opening / closing member 57) (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid) Since 57b) is initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (including the case where only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the gaming store (only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500). At the time of (including replacement of only), it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, first). 2 Special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator 63, second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67) Is in the non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources. Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and check the operation appropriately. It will be possible to do it.

In addition, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated, so that there are a plurality of pre-start states before the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.) without creating the state of.

Further, when the pre-start state ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. The initial operation of the source is no longer performed in the playable state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, and the game is performed in the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the above is performed, it is possible to confirm the two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. Since it is left as it is, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the large winning opening LED, and the operation check is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the second large winning opening are opened. Since the opening signal is not output in spite of this, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110 and to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the turning on the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game. Therefore, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started, the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the game is present, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, the clear preparation screen in which the characters "Preparing to clear RWM" are displayed is displayed, but in addition to the characters "Preparing to clear RWM", A clear preparation screen may be displayed in which the characters "During the initial operation of the drive source" or "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid" are displayed to prompt the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources.

Various operation timings (initial) of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500. The motion comparison in the motion, the jackpot game motion, the small hit game motion, the auxiliary game motion in the normal gaming state, and the auxiliary game motion in the time-saving gaming state) is the same as the motion comparison table shown in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

(Fourth modification)
Hereinafter, the fourth modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 56. The fourth modification is different from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, and the RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode, which is different from the second modification. Since there are differences, only the differences from the first embodiment and the second modification will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modification shown in FIG. 51 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. The path switching solenoid 52b and the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are subjected to processing for initial operation over a predetermined period. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and the payout control board 120 and the effect control. It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, specific area 53, second large winning opening 56) (difficulty of entering the ball), etc. Various drives for operating movable bodies (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member 52, second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the main information display 69 (No. 1) 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear is performed on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T3, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T4, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T5, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T6, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T7, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T8, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T9, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

In this way, in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member) that affects the result of the game. 52, various drive sources for operating the second prize opening opening / closing member 57) (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid) Since 57b) is initially operated, the gaming machine 1 (including the case where only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the gaming store (only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500). At the time of (including replacement of only), it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, first). 2 Special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator 63, second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67) Is in the non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. It is possible to notify the operator (worker, game shop clerk) who confirms the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is the timing to confirm the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started after the operation standby time has passed after the RWM clear operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to have a time margin from the completion of the RWM clearing operation to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately perform the operation confirmation.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is kept off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation. ..

In addition, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, and the game is performed in the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the above is performed, it is possible to confirm the two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the second large winning opening are opened. Since the above-mentioned opening signal is not output in spite of this, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110 and the information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the turning on the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game. Therefore, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started, the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the game is present, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Various operation timings (initial) of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500. The motion comparison in the motion, the jackpot game motion, the small hit game motion, the auxiliary game motion in the normal gaming state, and the auxiliary game motion in the time-saving gaming state) is the same as the motion comparison table shown in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

(Timing chart when a normal time-saving game state occurs)
FIG. 57 is a timing chart when a normal time-saving gaming state occurs.

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit is started. At this time, since the game is in the normal game state, all the information such as the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value and the total number of outs for setting the game section are aggregated (counted). It is running.

Next, at the timing of T2, the variation display of the winning normal symbol is started. In this variation display, a variation display with a relatively long normal map variation pattern (variation time is 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for a non-time saving state is performed.

After that, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the special symbol is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for the jackpot) of the special symbol has elapsed, the jackpot game (opening) is started and the right. As the hitting indicator 67 lights up, the output of the special game signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress and the advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal gaming state is started. In addition, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped, and the aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the game section continues (normal base value). And the display of the normal base value will continue).

Then, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Further, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game (low probability non-time saving game state), the variation display is performed by a relatively long normal map variation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time reduction state.

Next, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the jackpot game. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T10, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the normal symbol starts. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game, it is performed with a relatively long normal map variation pattern for non-time saving states. Then, at the timing of T11, when the big hit game (ending) is completed, the normal time saving game state is started, and the output of the special game signal is stopped.

Further, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is during the big hit game (low accuracy). Since it was started during the non-time saving game state), the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal-time variation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the normal time reduction game state. Since it has been started, the second starting port 47 will be opened with a long opening time for a short time state. Then, at the timing of T16, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started.

Here, an example in which the normal time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbol is shown, but even if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the stop display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, the following normal time-saving game state occurs. From the variation display of the symbol, the variation display is performed by the relatively short normal diagram variation pattern for the time saving state.

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state occurs, the normal time-saving game state will occur after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the big hit game) after the stop display of the special symbol that becomes the big hit ends. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous during the jackpot game, and it is possible to secure a profit balance between the game store side and the player side.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) occurs, a jackpot game that is a low-probability time-saving game state after a predetermined period before the normal time-saving game state occurs (the stop time of the lost special symbol has elapsed). The right-handed display 67 is turned on from (when) is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) occurs, a jackpot game that is a low-probability time-saving game state after a predetermined period before the normal time-saving game state occurs (the stop time of the lost special symbol has elapsed). (When) is started), the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended). Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even while the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), the normal base value can be calculated and the normal base value can be displayed. Since it is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) occurs, an advantageous state signal is sent from a predetermined period before the normal time-saving game state occurs (at the start of the jackpot game, which is the low-probability time-saving game state). It is designed to output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state occurs during the variation display of the normal symbol, a relatively short normal diagram for the time-saving state is displayed from the next normal symbol variation display regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed. Fluctuations are displayed according to fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the middle due to the occurrence of the normal time saving game state.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variation display is performed from the next normal symbol variation display to a relatively short normal time-saving pattern variation pattern for the time-saving state, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 will be opened with a long opening time for a short time state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state.

(Timing chart when the normal time saving game state ends)
FIG. 58 is a timing chart when the normal time saving game state ends.

First, at the timing of T1, the variation display of the special symbol which is the final round in the normal time-shortening game state, that is, the variation display of the special symbol which becomes a loss is started. At this time, since the normal time-saving game state is set, the right-handed display 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is output. In addition, since the game is in the normal time-saving game state, the information aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), while the game section is set. Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for this is being executed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the variation display of the winning normal symbol is started. Since this variation display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal-time variation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the normal time reduction game state. Since it has been started, the second starting port 47 will be opened with a long opening time for a short time state.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the time saving state, it is performed with a relatively short normal map fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

Further, at the timing of T6, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variation display of the normal symbol is in the normal time reduction game state. Since it has been started, the second starting port 47 will be opened with a long opening time for a short time state.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal-time variation pattern for the time-saving state. Then, when the stop display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T9, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is started, the right-handed display 67 is turned off, and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Will be done. In addition, since the game is in the normal game state, the totaling (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is restarted. In addition, the stop display of the normal symbol is started.

After that, at the timing of T10, the auxiliary game is started after the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, but since the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the normal time-saving game state, the second opening time is long for the time-saving state. The starting port 47 will be opened.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this variation display is started during the normal gaming state, the variation display is performed according to a relatively long normal map variation pattern (variation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time M of the special symbol (8.0 seconds at the end of the time reduction) elapses, the variation display of the next lost special symbol is started. Then, at the timing of T13, the stop display of the normal symbol is disclosed, and at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol starts during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the non-time saving state. Then, at the timing of T15, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started.

Here, an example is shown in which the normal time-saving game state ends during the stop display of the normal symbol, but even if the normal time-saving game state ends during the variable display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, the following normal time-saving game state is shown. From the variation display of the symbol, the variation display is performed by a relatively long normal map variation pattern (variation time is 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

In addition, since the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state and the normal time-saving game state ends, the right-handed display 67 is turned off and the advantageous state. The output of the signal is stopped, and the totaling (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal medium outs for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

In this way, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state advantageous to the player ends. There is. Therefore, it is possible to secure a profit balance between the game store side and the player side and provide the player with an unprecedented game property of a normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time saving game state, the normal time saving game state ends and the right-handed display 67 is turned off. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the end of the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state ends and the normal base value is calculated. Aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts and the number of normal outs is restarted. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It has become. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when the normal time saving game state ends during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol is relatively long for the non-time saving state. The fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern in the figure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the way when the normal time saving game state is completed.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variation display is performed from the next normal symbol variation display to a relatively long normal time-saving pattern variation pattern for the time-saving state, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 will be opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state.

(Timing chart from before the start to the end of the special time saving game state)
FIG. 59 is a timing chart from before the start to after the end of the special time-saving gaming state when the variation display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times (500 times).

First, at the timing of T1, the variation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times (500 times), is started from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the variation number based on the end of the jackpot game). To. Further, at the timing of T2, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. In this variation display, a variation display with a relatively long normal map variation pattern (variation time is 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for a non-time saving state is performed.

After that, when the stop display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T3, the special time-saving gaming state is started regardless of whether or not it is in the customer waiting state, the right-handed display 67 lights up, and the normal gaming state is started. The output of the advantageous state signal, which is more advantageous to the player than the player, is started. In addition, due to the special time-saving game state, the total number of outs for setting the game section is stopped (interrupted) by counting (counting) the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value. Aggregation (counting) is continued (calculation of normal base value and display of normal base value are also continued).

Then, when the stop time N (normal 0.5 seconds) of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a loss is started.

Further, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variation display of the normal symbol is in the special time saving game state. Since it has been started, the second starting port 47 will be opened with a long opening time for a short time state. In addition, the stop display of the lost special symbol is started.

Further, at the timing of T10, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for loss) of the special symbol elapses, the variation display of the next loss special symbol is started. Further, at the timing of T11, the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit after the auxiliary game is completed is disclosed. Since this variation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, the variation display of the special symbol which is the final round in the special time-saving game state, that is, the variation display of the special symbol which becomes a loss is started. Further, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is disclosed, but since the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the special time-saving game state, the second start port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time-saving state. Will be done.

Next, at the timing of T13, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the special time saving game state. Since it has been started, the second starting port 47 will be opened with a long opening time for a short time state.

Further, at the timing of T16, when the stop display (M for the final time reduction change) of the lost special symbol is started, the special time reduction game state ends, the normal game state starts, and the right-handed display 67 goes out. At the same time, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. In addition, since the game is in the normal game state, the counting of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is resumed.

Further, at the timing of T17, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), it is performed with a relatively long normal map variation pattern for the non-time saving state.

Further, at the timing of T18, when the stop time M (8.0 seconds for the final time reduction change) of the lost special symbol has elapsed, the variation display of the special symbol to be lost is started, and at the timing of T19, the lost special symbol is displayed. The stop display is started.

Then, at the timing of T20, the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a loss is started. In addition, after the auxiliary game is completed, the variable display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), it is performed with a relatively long normal map variation pattern for the non-time saving state.

Then, at the timing of T21, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but since the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the normal game state, the second opening time is short for the non-time saving state. The starting port 47 will be opened.

Here, an example is shown in which the special time-saving game state is started during the variable display of the normal symbol, but even if the special time-saving game state occurs during the stop display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game, the following From the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the time saving state will be performed.

In addition, an example was shown in which the special time-saving game state ends during the execution of the auxiliary game, but even if the special time-saving game state ends during the variable display of the normal symbol or the stop display of the normal symbol, the next From the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to be executed, the fluctuation display by the relatively long normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the non-time saving state will be performed.

In addition, although the example in which the variation display of the special symbol, which is the final round in the special time-saving game state, is lost, even if it is a small hit, the variation display of the normal symbol executed next is non-time reduction. The fluctuation display will be performed by the relatively long inning fluctuation pattern for the state.

In this way, the loss special symbol is stopped as a result of the variation display of the special symbol which is the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the fluctuation number based on the end of the jackpot game). When it is displayed, a special time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (started) regardless of whether or not the player is waiting for a customer. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented playability that a time saving state occurs even though the game is lost, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed. When (the stop time is started), a special time-saving game state is generated (started) and the right-handed display 67 is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed. When (stop time starts), a special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the totaling of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal medium-outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped, that is, the special time-saving game state. The calculation of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs is continued until just before the occurrence of. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even while the aggregation of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped, the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value are continued, so the display is performed. It is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the normal base value.

In addition, as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed. When (the stop time is started), a special time-saving game state is generated (started) and an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbol, a relatively short normal diagram for the time-saving state is displayed from the next normal symbol variation display regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed. Fluctuations are displayed according to fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the middle due to the occurrence of the special time saving game state.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variation display is performed from the next normal symbol variation display to a relatively short normal symbol variation pattern for the time-saving state, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 will be opened with a long opening time for a short time state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round (750th) in the special time-saving game state, when the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player ends. ing. Therefore, it is possible to secure a profit balance between the game store side and the player side and provide the player with an unprecedented game property of a special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol which is the final round (750th) in the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the right-handed display 67 turns off. It is supposed to do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the end of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol which is the final round (750th) in the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the normal base value is calculated. The total number of normal payouts and normal middle outs is restarted, that is, the calculation of the normal middle payouts and the normal middle outs is restarted from the end of the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol which is the final round (750th) in the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It is supposed to do. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when the special time-saving game state ends during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol is relatively long for the non-time-saving state. The fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern in the figure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the middle when the special time saving game state is completed.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variation display is performed from the next normal symbol variation display to a relatively long normal symbol variation pattern for the time-saving state, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 will be opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state.

In addition, the lost special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), The stop display may be made for a longer time than the normal stop time (0.5 seconds). By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that the special time-saving game state occurs due to the length of the stop time, and it is possible to secure the time for producing the special time-saving game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the lost special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the specified number of times (500 times) is stopped and displayed for a longer time than the normal stop time, the special time saving game is performed during the stop time. You may want to perform an effect that suggests that a condition will occur. By doing so, it is possible to immediately notify the player of the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
The main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interruptions in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears 0) the entire RWM area (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and in step E6, all interruptions are permitted.

The sub CPU 130a performs the sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit)
A timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130 m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs the timer update process in step E200. Specifically, a process of updating various timer counters necessary for executing the effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol or the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is not executed, and the customer. Based on the elapse of the waiting time, a process for executing a customer waiting demo effect for stimulating the player's motivation to play is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs an operation system effect execution process in step E500. Specifically, a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period generated during the variable effect is executed, and the expectation that the jackpot game is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period is determined. The process for executing the jackpot notice effect of the operation system that suggests (expects that the jackpot game is executed) is performed.

As the "operation system jackpot notice effect", the line notice effect suggesting the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed depending on the type and display mode of the dialogue displayed on the image display device, and the result of the roulette executed on the image display device. A roulette notice effect that suggests the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, a cut-in notice effect that suggests the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed depending on the type and display mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot game. There are four types of winning and winning effects that suggest whether or not the special game is executed by the success effect with 100% expectation of execution or the failure effect with 0% expectation that the jackpot game is executed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the lamp light emission effect execution process in step E600. Specifically, the lamp light emission suggesting the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed by changing the light emission mode of the start port lamp 75 according to the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the change in the display mode of the icon. Perform processing to execute the production.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode update process in step E700. Specifically, the update of the effect mode (effect stage) in which the effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP / SPSP reach effect that results in loss, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, multiple effect modes are displayed. Perform processing to update to any of the modes.

The "directing mode" is a directing mode A to C set in the normal gaming state (non-short game state), a countdown mode, and a rush battle mode, a random dance mode, a super random dance mode, and an infinite mode set in the normal short game state. Etc. are provided. The effect mode that is initially set when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the setting, clearing the RWM, confirming the setting, etc.) is always the effect mode A, and the power supply is used. The effect mode that is initially set when controlled to the time-saving game state at the time of ON is one of a rush battle mode, a random dance mode, a super random dance mode, and an infinite mode.

The "effect modes A to C" are the fluctuations when the normal special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 20 is selected (there is no jackpot history or there is a jackpot history and the variation until the special time saving game state is started. The effect mode is set to (when the number of times is 51 or more).
In the "countdown mode", when the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for normal use shown in FIG. 20B is selected (the number of fluctuations until the special time saving game state is started due to the jackpot history is 50 times). The effect mode is set to (in the following cases).

The "rush battle mode" is set when the special figure variation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for normal time reduction shown in FIG. 21 is selected (when 7 times is selected as the second time reduction number in the normal time reduction game state). It is a production mode set to.
In the "random dance mode", when the special figure variation pattern determination table 3 or 4 for normal time reduction shown in FIG. 22 is selected (55 times, 95 times, or 496 times is selected as the second time reduction number, the normal time reduction game is selected. In the state, the remaining number of small hits is 1 (including the case where it is subtracted to 1), or the special figure variation pattern determination table 3 for special time reduction shown in FIG. 25 is displayed. It is an effect mode that is set when it is selected (when 750 times are selected as the second time reduction number and the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1 time in the special time reduction game state).

The "super random dance mode" is a small normal time saving game state in which 95 times is selected as the second time saving number when the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 5 or 6 for normal time saving shown in FIG. 23 is selected. The effect mode is set to (when the number of remaining hits is 2).
The "infinite mode" is a small hit in the normal time saving game state in which 496 times are selected as the second time saving number when the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 7 or 8 for normal time saving shown in FIG. 24 is selected. When the remaining number of times is 2) or when the special figure variation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for special time reduction shown in FIG. 25 is selected (special time 750 times is selected as the second time reduction number). It is an effect mode set to (when the game is in a short-time game state and the remaining number of small hits is 2).

In step E750, the sub CPU 130a performs a special time-saving effect processing. Specifically, a special time-saving system effect for suggesting information related to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state (RWM clear denial effect and special time-saving game suggesting that the RWM clear described later is not performed (deferred)). Performs processing such as determining whether or not to execute (invocation counter display, etc.) that suggests the number of fluctuations until the state shifts to the state. The details of the special time-saving effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E800. Specifically, it performs a process for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Command analysis processing of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether or not a command has been received. If a command is received, the process is transferred to step E302, and if no command is received, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E303, and if it is not a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is transferred to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is transferred to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs the power ON notification process in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the received command is the power recovery designation command. If this is the case, the process of setting the notification instruction command for executing the power recovery notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the power-on notification or the power restoration notification, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable). A process for executing an initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the panel lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, or the like is performed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error-type designation command, the process is transferred to step E309, and if it is not an error-type specification command, the process is transferred to step E310.

"Error-based specification commands" include non-recoverable error specification commands, illegal winning error specification commands, abnormal winning error specification commands, magnetic error specification commands, radio wave error specification commands, door open error start specification commands, and door open error end specifications. Includes commands, operation error specification commands, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of received error specification command (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification) Etc.)), the notification command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E311. If it is not a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, a process of updating the game state stored in the sub RAM 130c to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command is performed.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process is transferred to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of updating the special figure hold number stored in the sub RAM 130c and setting an effect instruction command for increasing or decreasing the hold icon displayed on the image display device in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. conduct. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the hold icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a look-ahead designation command. If it is a look-ahead designation command, set the received look-ahead designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) in the look-ahead storage area described later in the sub RAM 130c, and then move to step E315. If it is not a look-ahead designation command, The process is transferred to step E318.

The "look-ahead storage area" sequentially stores the first look-ahead storage unit for sequentially storing the look-ahead information (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, etc.) based on the first look-ahead designation command, and the hold information based on the second look-ahead designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for storing the look-ahead information (0th storage unit) for storing the look-ahead information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) during execution, and the first look-ahead storage unit and the first The two look-ahead storage units are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-mentioned first special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the first look-ahead storage unit corresponds to the first to fourth storage units. The look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to one reserved number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to move (shift) one number to a younger storage unit each time the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-mentioned second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the second look-ahead designation command is received, the second look-ahead storage unit is used. 2 Look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to move (shift) one number to a younger storage unit each time the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special figure determination information execution storage area, and is the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead unit is stored. To.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon change effect determination process in step E315. Specifically, it is expected that a special game will be executed by displaying the hold icon displayed on the image display device or the icon in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon). Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect that suggests the degree (possibility), and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a light emission effect determination process at the time of winning. Specifically, when the game ball is awarded to the starting port, the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is made to emit light in a special light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode. Performs processing for determining whether or not to execute the light emitting effect at the time of winning, which suggests the degree of expectation to be executed, and the effect mode of the light emitting effect at the time of winning to be executed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect determination process. Specifically, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols (suggesting the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the look-ahead continuous effect and the type of the look-ahead continuous effect to be executed are determined, and an effect instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to execute the look-ahead continuous effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead continuous effect determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs the symbol data determination process in step E319. Specifically, a process of determining an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variation effect, that is, an arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line is performed.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process is transferred to step E321, and if it is not a special map variation pattern designation command, the process is transferred to step E325.

The sub CPU 130a performs the variation effect pattern determination process in step E321. Specifically, based on the content of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the effect device including the image display device, is determined, and the effect showing the variation effect pattern is determined. The process of setting the instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed. The details of the variation effect pattern determination process will be described later.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot notice effect determination process. Specifically, whether or not to execute the jackpot notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed (expected that the jackpot game will be executed) based on the variation effect pattern determined in step E321. Further, the effect mode (pattern) of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed is determined, and the execution information of the jackpot advance notice effect is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon display mode update process in step E323. Specifically, a process for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, or changing the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead continuous effect execution process in step E324. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous effect determined in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 or changing the effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a symbol determination command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step E326, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step E327.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol stop processing in step E326. Specifically, a process is performed in which an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in the temporarily stopped state and ending the variable effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variation effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designated command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process is transferred to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, a small hit opening designation command, a small hit ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs a special game effect determination process in step E328. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, a process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the big hit game or the small hit game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the round is performed. In the case of the designated command, the process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the round effect of the round game and executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the ending specified command, the jackpot game or A process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the ending effect of the small hit game and executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the current command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the executable period of the icon change effect, the process is moved to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period of the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E315-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" means that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the game is in the normal game state when the look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first start port 45 is received, and that the second start port is in the normal game state. When a look-ahead designation command based on winning a prize in 47 is received, it may be in a time-saving game state (specific game state).

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance hold (holding storage corresponding to the previously received look-ahead designation command), that is, whether or not the change scenario is set in the look-ahead information storage area. Is determined. If there is a change scenario, the process is transferred to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process is transferred to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E315-5. , Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the final display mode of the icon. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, referring to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of icon final display modes are based on the type of the start opening winning designation command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. The final display mode of one icon is determined from among them.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (white icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E315-8 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is a special icon (any of a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for executing the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E315-9, and if the display mode is not for executing the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41, it is based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Then, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a specifies a winning icon, which is a display mode of the icon first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, and the winning icon of the winning icon. Set the icon display command in the transmission buffer, and end the icon change effect determination process this time.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed with a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed with a special icon or a specific icon) may be output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the read-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined effect sound (first winning sound) may be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the advance hold is the reach effect. If the icon change effect is not performed, the icon change effect may be executed, and if the reach effect is performed, the icon change effect may not be executed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the case where the advance hold does not include the one that performs the reach effect is the case where the reach effect is performed. The icon change effect may be easier to be executed (executed at a higher rate) than the case where the icon change effect is included.

Further, the icon change effect is executed when the look-ahead designation command related to the second special symbol is received in the time-saving game state, but even if the look-ahead designation command related to the second special symbol is received in the time-saving game state. The icon change effect may not be executed. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon change effect may not be executed without displaying the icon itself.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the type of the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and corresponds to the look-ahead designation command as a reference. The contents of the production of the planned fluctuation pattern to be performed are described.

In the final icon display mode, there are a normal icon (white icon) that does not suggest the expectation of a big hit or a small hit, and a special icon (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) that suggests the expectation of a big hit or a small hit. It is set. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit or a small hit related to the special icon is higher in the order of (white icon <) blue icon <red icon <rainbow icon (big hit confirmed).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that when the look-ahead designation command indicates a big hit, the rainbow icon may be determined as the icon final display mode. When the look-ahead designation command indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final display mode of the icon. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by not making the player happy at the time when the big hit game is not confirmed to be executed.

The second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 64 is the red icon when the look-ahead designation command related to the second special symbol transmitted only during the time-saving gaming state indicates a small hit. The point that the rate at which the red icon is determined when it indicates a big hit is higher than the rate at which is determined. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the big hit and the small hit for which the big hit game is not confirmed to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the look-ahead designation command indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final display mode of the icon. However, in the small hit game of the present embodiment, the game ball is hit to the right. As long as there is a probability of passing the game ball through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100%, the jackpot game will be executed. Therefore, the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's awareness of the small hit game and improve the interest of the game.

Also, if the rainbow icon is determined when the look-ahead designation command related to the second special symbol, which is transmitted only during the time-saving game state, indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon indicates a small hit. It is better to make the ratio that indicates the jackpot and the rainbow icon is determined higher than the ratio that is determined.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, for reference. Preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and how to update the icon in the fluctuations are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 04, etc.) that is not executed, and the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the variation (hold icon change effect and icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state (icon of the first special symbol) or the specific game state (icon of the second special symbol). For example, the specific game is determined. In the case of a state (icon of the second special symbol), the rate of change of the icon due to the change is higher than the rate of change of the icon due to the advance change (for example, 20:80, 0:100, etc.). You may. In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher in the specific gaming state (icon of the second special symbol) than in the normal gaming state (icon of the first special symbol). You may.

(Light emission effect determination process when winning a prize in the effect control unit)
FIG. 66 will be described with reference to the process of determining the light emission effect at the time of winning of the effect control unit 130 m. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a light emission effect determination process at the time of winning in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E316-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E316-2, determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the light emission effect at the time of winning. If it is the executable period of the light emitting effect at the time of winning, the process is moved to step E316-3, and if it is not the executable period of the light emitting effect at the time of winning, the light emitting effect at the time of winning is executed based on the look-ahead designation command received this time. As a result of not doing so, the process of determining the light emission effect at the time of winning this time is terminated.

The "executable period of the light emitting effect at the time of winning" means that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the game is in the normal game state when the look-ahead designation command based on the winning to the first starting port 45 is received, and the second starting. When a look-ahead designation command based on a prize in the mouth 47 is received, it may be in a time-saving game state.

In step E316-3, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the light emitting effect pattern at the time of winning for determining the effect pattern of the light emitting effect at the time of winning executed by the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and steps E316-. In step 4, the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 67) for determining the winning light emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the light emission effect pattern at the time of winning in step E316-5. Specifically, with reference to the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, a plurality of special symbols are used, based on the type of the special symbol, the type of the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each winning light emitting effect pattern. One winning light emitting effect pattern is determined from the winning light emitting effect patterns.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E316-6 whether or not the determined light emitting effect pattern at the time of winning is a pattern for executing the light emitting effect at the time of winning. If the pattern is to execute the light emitting effect at the time of winning, the process is moved to step E316-7, and if the pattern is not to execute the light emitting effect at the time of winning, the current light emitting effect determining process at the time of winning is terminated.

In step E316-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the winning light emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emitting effect determining process. As a result, the winning light emitting effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the winning light emitting effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the winning light emitting effect execution command.

(Light emission production pattern determination table at the time of winning)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a winning light emitting effect pattern.

In the winning light emission effect pattern determination table, the type of special symbol, the type of look-ahead designation command (scheduled fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning light emission effect pattern, and the selected winning light emission effect pattern are displayed. It is associated with each other, and as a reference, the effect mode for each light emission effect pattern at the time of winning is described.

The winning light emission effect pattern is set to the winning light emitting effect pattern 00, which does not execute the winning light emitting effect, and the winning light emitting effect patterns 01 and 02, which execute the winning light emitting effect. In the winning light emission effect patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits light in white or yellow, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the voice output device 9.

The first feature of the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the look-ahead designation command (planned variation pattern) having a high jackpot expectation is higher than the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) having a low jackpot expectation. However, there is a point that it is easy to execute the light emission effect at the time of winning. By doing so, it becomes easy to raise the player's expectation that the variable effect having a high jackpot expectation is executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that it is easier to execute the winning light emitting effect in the case of a big hit than in the case of loss. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation of becoming a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the winning light emitting pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that unlike the icon final display mode shown in FIG. 64, there is no winning light emitting effect pattern (effect mode) in which a big hit is confirmed (correct). Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player from the time when the game ball is won to the starting port until the result of the variable effect is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that a winning light emission effect pattern (for example, the top lamp 10b emits rainbow colors and a confirmed notification sound is output from the voice output device 9) may be provided to confirm the big hit. In this case, the full rotation reach is provided. It is preferable that the light emission effect pattern at the time of winning, which is the jackpot confirmation at the lowest rate when is executed, is determined.

(Pre-reading continuous production determination process of the production control unit)
A look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E530-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the current look-ahead continuous effect determination process is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the read-ahead designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled fluctuation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present is the feasible period of the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the runnable period of the look-ahead zone effect, the process is moved to step E317-4, and if it is not the runnable period of the look-ahead zone effect, the look-ahead zone effect based on the read-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E317-6.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is a zone-in-zone effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image or a red thermal zone image, output of a zone BGM or a thermal zone BGM) over one or a plurality of variable effects. This is a production that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by the background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of pre-reading continuous production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead zone effect" includes that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead zone effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not in progress, that the game is in the normal game state, and the like. Therefore, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal gaming state, but the look-ahead zone effect is not executed in the time-saving game state.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 69) for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario. The details of the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 69, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each advance notice scenario. Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as an effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

The sub CPU 130a sets the pre-reading zone effect scenario determined in step E317-7 in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect. If it is the executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect, the process is moved to step E317-9, and if it is not the executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect, the look-ahead countdown effect based on the pre-reading designation command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead countdown effect" is the expectation that a special game will be executed by performing a countdown effect (displaying a count image, outputting a count sound) over one or more variable effects, intermittently by character information and sound information. It is a suggestive production and is a kind of pre-reading continuous production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect" includes that there is no advance hold that executes the look-ahead countdown effect, that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the game is in a time-saving game state, and the like. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed in the normal game state, but the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed in the time-saving game state.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 70) for determining a look-ahead countdown effect scenario. The details of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the look-ahead countdown effect scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each effect scenario. Based on (%), one look-ahead countdown effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead countdown effect scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead countdown effect as an effect scenario in which the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the pre-reading countdown effect scenario determined in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead countdown effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead countdown effect is performed. When this process is completed, the pre-reading continuous effect determination process is terminated.

In this way, the types of look-ahead continuous effects executed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state are made different. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the time-saving gaming state in which the short fluctuation time is easily determined because the number of holdings is more likely to increase than in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead zone effect that is continuously executed over one or more variation effects is not executed. There is. Therefore, the inconvenience of reducing the effect of the look-ahead zone effect, which is desired to secure a long effect time in one variable effect, does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the time-saving game state in which the short fluctuation time is easily determined because the number of holdings is more likely to increase than in the normal game state, the look-ahead countdown effect that is intermittently executed over one or more variation effects is executed. There is. Therefore, it is easy to raise the expectation of the player by the look-ahead countdown effect in which the effect time in one variable effect is short, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The look-ahead zone effect may be executed even in the time-saving gaming state, or the look-ahead countdown effect may be executed even in the normal gaming state.

(Look-ahead zone production scenario determination table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario.

In the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the effect scenario of each look-ahead zone effect, and the selected look-ahead. The effect scenarios of the zone effect are associated with each other, and as a reference, the pre-variation in each effect scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect in the change are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

The "zone" means that the normal zone effect (displaying the look-ahead zone background image, displaying the blue zone image, and outputting the zone BGM) is executed, and the "heat zone" means that the normal zone is used. The effect in the heat zone (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the red heat zone image, output of the heat zone BGM), which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the effect, is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed (for example, scenario 00), and a scenario in which the zone-in-zone effect is not executed during the pre-variation and the zone-in-zone effect is executed during the change (for example). For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which the in-zone effect is executed during the pre-variation and the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 69 is a production scenario in which the production mode of the production in the zone does not progress (change) to a production mode in which the execution expectation of the special game is high, and a production of the production in the zone. One point is that a production scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to a production mode in which the execution expectation of the special game is high. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the production mode of the production in the zone progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that the change is more likely to develop (change) the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect than the advance change. By doing so, it becomes easy to maintain the expectation of the player for a long period of time, and the expectation of the player can be climaxed in the fluctuation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Look-ahead countdown production scenario determination table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead countdown effect scenario.

In the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each look-ahead countdown effect effect scenario, and the selected look-ahead. The effect scenario of the countdown effect is associated with each other, and as a reference, the pre-variation in each effect scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead countdown effect in the change are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

"Count 3" means that the count image indicating "3" is displayed and the count sound is output, and "count 2" means that the count image indicating "2" is displayed and the count sound is output. "Count 1" means that a count image indicating "1" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "count 0" means that a count image indicating "0" is displayed. And the output of the count sound is performed.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70 is that the look-ahead countdown effect is executed not only when a big hit occurs but also when a small hit (a planned fluctuation pattern that expects a small hit). The points that are possible are mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the small hit game is executed by the entry of the game ball into the specific area 53, and the interest of the game is enhanced. It will be possible to improve.

The second feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70 is that the maximum value of the count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. By doing so, the player can have a sense of expectation without being aware of whether it is a big hit or a small hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 70 is that the effect mode of the look-ahead countdown effect is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. By doing so, the player can have a sense of expectation without being aware of whether it is a big hit or a small hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a small hit, the number of rounds and the number of time reductions of the big hit game to be transferred when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small hit game are specified or unpredictable. However, the countdown effect is executed in a manner that can specify or predict the number of rounds and the number of time reductions of the big hit game that shifts when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small hit game. You may do so. For example, the font and size of the count image may be different, or the type and volume of the count sound may be different depending on whether the number of rounds or the number of time reductions is relatively small or the number of rounds or the number of time reductions is relatively large. You may.

(Variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit)
A variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the fluctuation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step E321-1, and determines in step E321-2 whether or not the current gaming state is present. If it is in the normal gaming state, the process is transferred to step E321-3, and if it is not in the normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state), the process is transferred to step E321-7.

In step E321-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect is the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. If it is the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol, the process is transferred to step E321-4, and if it is not the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol), step E321-. Move the process to 6.

In step E321-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol is in the normal time-saving gaming state. If it is not in the normal time-saving game state (it is in the special time-saving game state), the process is transferred to step E321-6, and if it is in the normal time-saving game state, in step E321-5. , The variation effect pattern determination table for remaining hold (see FIG. 72 (c)) is selected, and the process is transferred to step E321-14. The details of the variation effect pattern determination table for the remaining hold will be described later.

In step E321-6, the sub CPU 130a selects a normal variation effect pattern determination table (omitted in the figure) and shifts the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is present. If it is not in the normal time-saving game state (it is in the special time-saving game state), the process is transferred to step E321-13, and if it is in the normal time-saving game state, in step E321-8, the current variation effect is the normal time-saving game. It is determined whether or not the variation effect before the final state (the number of remaining time reductions is 1 or more) in the state. If it is not the variation effect before the final (it is the variation effect of the final round), the process is moved to step E321-10, and if it is the variation effect before the final, in step E321-9, the normal time reduction before the final variation is performed. Select the variation effect pattern determination table (omitted in the figure) for use, and move the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current rush battle mode is in effect. In the rush battle mode, in step E321-11, the variation effect pattern determination table 1 (see FIG. 72 (a)) for the normal time saving final variation is selected, the process is transferred to step E321-14, and the rush battle is performed. If it is not in the mode, in step E321-12, the variation effect pattern determination table 2 (see FIG. 72 (b)) for the normal time saving final variation is selected and the process is transferred to step E321-14. The details of the variation effect pattern determination table for the normal time reduction final variation will be described later.

In step E321-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a variation effect pattern determination table for special time reduction (omitted in the figure) and shifts the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-14, the sub CPU 130a determines one variation effect pattern from the plurality of variation effect patterns with reference to the selected variation effect pattern determination table, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E321-15, the sub CPU 130a sets the variation effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variation effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variation effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table for time saving final variation)
FIG. 72 (a) is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the time reduction final variation, which is referred to when determining the variation effect pattern in the final variation effect in the normal time reduction game state (rush battle mode). FIG. 72B is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the time reduction final variation, which is referred to when determining the variation effect pattern in the final variation effect in the normal time saving game state (other than the rush battle mode). ..

As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), in the variation effect pattern determination table for the time saving final variation, the type of the special map variation pattern corresponding to the special map variation pattern designation command, the current second special The pre-reading result of the remaining hold of the symbol, the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and the selected variation effect pattern are associated with each other, and the effect configuration in each variation effect pattern is described as a reference.

The "final battle introduction effect" is an introduction effect to the final battle effect in which a big hit or a small hit is applied to confront the enemy character in the variable effect in which the time-saving game state ends.
The "final battle SP reach" is a special SP reach effect that performs the above-mentioned final battle effect, and the two effect symbols 70a forming the reach state are reduced to both upper corners of the image display device. It is designed to move to and perform a battle production to confront the enemy character.
The "final battle SP reach of victory confirmation" is a special SP reach effect that performs the above-mentioned final battle effect, and the two effect symbols 70a forming the reach state are reduced to the upper side of the image display device. It moves to both corners and performs a battle production that is confirmed to win the enemy character.

The "defeat production" is a production that suggests that the enemy character has been defeated in the final battle production.
The "victory production" is a production that suggests that the enemy character has been defeated in the final battle production.

The "result display" is an effect of displaying the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by the big hit game from the normal game state called the so-called first hit.
The "special result display" is basically the same as the above-mentioned result display, but suggests that it will be a big hit or a small hit in the variable effect related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a result display as a kind of look-ahead effect.

The "end suggestion effect" is an effect that suggests that the normal time-saving game state ends. Specifically, is it a loss because the effect image such as the background image is blocked by closing the shutter image? It is a production to show to the player like.
The "revival effect" is an effect that notifies (suggests) that it is a big hit or a small hit from the place where it was lost. Specifically, a combination of big hit effect symbols appears by breaking the shutter image. It is a production.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 72 (a) is that the variation effect pattern in which the final battle effect is always executed is selected. By doing so, it is possible to efficiently improve the expectation of the player in the final variable production in the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the time reduction final variation shown in FIG. 72 (a) is that when the final variation effect in the time reduction gaming state is a small hit or a big hit, a battle effect of winning is confirmed. There are some points that may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security from the start of the battle production (final battle SP reach), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the time saving final variation shown in FIG. 72 (a) is that the variation effect related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is a small hit or a big hit. In some cases, even if the final variable effect of the time-saving game state is lost, a battle effect of winning confirmation as a kind of look-ahead effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected fluctuation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the time saving final variation shown in FIG. 72 (a) is that the variation effect related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is a big hit or a small hit. There is a point that a special result display may be executed as a kind of look-ahead effect suggesting that. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the delight of the player by pretending that the time-saving game state is over, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the time saving final variation shown in FIG. 72 (b) is that the variation effect pattern in which the result display from the end suggestion effect is always executed is selected. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the time reduction final variation shown in FIG. 72 (b) is that the revival effect is executed when the final variation effect in the time reduction gaming state is a small hit or a big hit. There are points. By doing so, it is possible to surprise the player by making him think that the normal time-saving game state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the time saving final variation shown in FIG. 72 (b) is that the variation effect related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is a big hit or a small hit. There is a point that a special result display may be executed as a kind of look-ahead effect suggesting that. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the delight of the player by pretending that the time-saving game state is over, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table for remaining hold)
FIG. 72 (c) is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table for residual hold, which is referred to when determining a variation effect pattern in the variation effect related to the residual hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. ..

As shown in FIG. 72 (c), in the variation effect pattern determination table for remaining hold, the type of the special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and the selection. The variation effect patterns to be performed are associated with each other, and the effect configuration in each variation effect pattern is described as a reference.

"Continue result" is an effect of continuing the result display in the final variable effect of the time-saving game state.
The "revival effect" is an effect that suggests that the result display in the final variable effect of the time-saving game state will be revived and become a big hit or a small hit.
The "revival long production" is a production that suggests that the result display in the final variable production of the short-time game state will be revived and become a big hit or a small hit for a longer period than the above-mentioned revival production. ..

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table for remaining hold shown in FIG. 72 (b) is that the result display in the final variation effect of the time-saving gaming state may be taken over and the result display may be continued. .. By doing so, it is possible to perform a series of effects from the final variable effect of the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect before and after the end of the time-saving game state.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table for remaining hold shown in FIG. 72 (b) is that the effect content (result display) in the final variation effect of the time-saving game state is taken over and the revival effect or the revival long effect is executed. There are points to do. By doing so, it is possible to perform a series of effects from the final variable effect of the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect before and after the end of the time-saving game state.

(Special time-saving effect processing of the effect control unit)
A special time-saving effect process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the special time saving system effect processing in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is in progress. If it is not in the time-saving game state, the process is moved to step E750-2, and if it is in the time-saving game state, it is suggested that the special time-saving system effect (the RWM clear described later is not performed (deferred)). This special time-saving effect processing is terminated assuming that the RWM clear negative effect and the activation counter display suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving game state are not executed.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-2 whether or not the variation effect has been started. If the variation effect has not been started, the process is transferred to step E750-16, and if the variation effect is started, is the RWM clear performed when the power is turned on in step E750-3 (power-on designation command)? Was received) or not. If the RWM clear has been performed, the process is transferred to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not executed, and if the RWM clear has been performed, the process is transferred to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a history of executing the jackpot game from the power ON to the present. If there is a jackpot history, the process is transferred to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not executed, and if there is no jackpot history, the process is transferred to step E750-5.

In step E750-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving gaming state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If it is not within the predetermined number, the process is transferred to step E750-16 assuming that the special time saving effect (RWM clear negative effect, activation counter display) is not executed, and if it is within the predetermined number, step E750-6 is performed. Move the process.

In step E750-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations from the power recovery (reception of the power recovery designation command) is the first number (here, 50 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the first, the process is transferred to step E750-10, and if the number of fluctuations is the first, in step E750-7, whether or not the RWM clear negative effect is executed and is activated. Whether or not the counter is displayed is determined by lottery (for example, a ratio of 1/2).

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-8 whether or not it is determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect or the activation counter display. If it is decided not to execute the RWM clear negative effect or activation counter display, the process is transferred to step E750-16, and if it is decided to execute the RWM clear negative effect or activation counter display, step E750-9. In, the effect execution command according to the determination result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the special time saving system effect (RWM clear negative effect and / or display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations from the power recovery (reception of the power recovery designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the second, the process is moved to step E750-16, and if the number of fluctuations is the second, whether or not the RWM clear negative effect is executed and whether or not the activation counter is displayed are displayed. decide. Specifically, if the RWM clear negative effect has not been executed, it is determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect, and if the activation counter display has not been executed, it is determined to execute the activation counter display.

The sub CPU 130a sets an effect execution command according to the determination result in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the special time saving system effect (RWM clear negative effect and / or display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations from the power ON is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is the second number, the process is transferred to step E750-15, and if the number of fluctuations is not the second number, in step E750-14, is the normal time-saving gaming state shifted to the effect mode A? It is determined whether or not (whether or not all the variable effects according to the remaining hold of the second special symbol have been completed). When the normal time-saving game state is shifted to the effect mode A, the process is transferred to step E750-15, and when the normal time-saving game state is not shifted to the effect mode A, the process is transferred to step E750-16.

In step E750-15, the sub CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the special time saving system effect (here, the display of the activation counter) is performed.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-16 whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (whether or not the symbol confirmation command has been received). If the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the process is moved to step E750-17, and if the effect symbol is not stopped and displayed, the special time-saving effect process this time is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-17 whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not displayed, the special time saving effect processing this time is terminated, and if the activation counter is being displayed, the activation counter subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in step E750-18. do. As a result, the activation counter subtraction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for subtracting the value of the activation counter is performed. When this processing is completed, the special time-saving effect processing this time is completed.

In this way, the RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) is not executed when the power is turned on during the execution of the variation effect for the predetermined number of times (before the predetermined number of times when the special time saving game state is activated) from the time when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute the RWM clear denial effect that suggests that it is (deferred). Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the special time-saving game state occurs by referring to the number of fluctuations on the previous day, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a plurality of execution timings of the RWM clear denial effect are set, and if it is executed at any timing, it is not executed again at any other timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player regarding the timing at which the RWM clear denial effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display an activation counter that is suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving game state (the activation countdown effect can be executed). Therefore, the player can grasp the time when the special time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to have a motivation to continue the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game machine.

In addition, the activation counter is not displayed during the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player's consciousness is directed to the special time-saving game state even though the player is in the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the activation counter is subtracted when the effect symbol is stopped, which makes it harder to execute (start) the jackpot notice effect or look-ahead effect than at the start of the change, not at the start of the variable effect where the jackpot notice effect or look-ahead effect is likely to be executed (started). Since (countdown) is performed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that instead of subtracting the activation counter (countdown) when the effect symbol is stopped, the activation counter may be subtracted (countdown) at the start of the variable effect. In this case, the activation counter may be subtracted until the effect symbol 70a starts to fluctuate and completely shifts to high-speed fluctuation (becomes a constant speed), or the effect symbol may be raised or otherwise fluctuated in the variation effect. The activation counter may be subtracted by the time when the pre-movement is performed and then the scroll (variation) is performed, and the pre-variation operation is completed.

(Example of effect when pre-reading effect is executed during normal game state)
An example of the effect when the look-ahead effect is executed during the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 74. Here, it is assumed that the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 during the variation display (execution of the variation effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a loss, and the first hold number is changed from "1" to "1". When it increases to "2", the number in the first hold number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect, the icon change effect, is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. A white icon (holding icon HI) to be notified of the look-ahead zone effect) is additionally displayed. In the lower left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70, the number of games GK, which is the number of variable displays (variable effects) executed after the power is turned on or after the jackpot game is completed, is displayed.

Next, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the loss (“814”), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is erased.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a loss is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts as shown in FIG. 74 (c). Then, the number in the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. It is displayed, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the number of games GK is added by 1.

At this time, the icon change effect is started, and the hold icon shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the look-ahead zone effect is started, the background image is changed to the look-ahead zone background, and the blue zone image ZG is displayed. Next, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 74 (d), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are stopped and displayed at the loss (“531”), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is erased.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts as shown in FIG. 74 (e). The first hold icon display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. Is displayed as the icon TI and changes to a red icon (special icon). In addition, the number of games GK is added by 1.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 74 (f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state of forming a reach, and the normal reach effect is executed. Further, when the predetermined time elapses, the development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (g), the SP reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 battle is started, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the corresponding The icon display area 70C is hidden (erased), and the look-ahead zone effect is interrupted.

Then, when the final phase of the SP reach effect (execution timing of the effect of determining whether or not the character is lost) is reached, the effect of successful decision is started and the ally character C2 launches the final attack on the enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and the voice output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "cue-in-cure" (here, it is a big hit). Will be notified).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the effect position to the standby position and the successful effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 74 (i), the effect symbol 70a is a special result common to the small hit and the big hit ( It temporarily stops at "555"), the look-ahead zone effect is restarted, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a special roll (“555”) common to the small hit and the big hit, and the special symbol TZ indicates the small hit. Stop display at the jackpot (“555”) that does not include “V”. Further, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss, when the final phase of the SP reach effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether or not the character is lost) is reached, the failure effect is started and the ally character C2 becomes the enemy character. A production that loses to C3 is performed. After that, when the character screen of "defeat" is displayed and it is notified that the game is lost and the decision failure effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the reach loss result (for example, "565"). become.

In this way, the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed when a big hit occurs in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectations of the player when the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when variable production is executed after shifting to rush battle mode)
An example of the effect when the variable effect is executed after the transition to the rush battle mode will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

When the ending of the third big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), a time-saving rush effect suggesting that the game is in a time-saving game state is executed, and attention is drawn to the player. Awakening notification is executed. Specifically, the forget-to-take caution image TG is displayed to be careful about forgetting to take out the card (storage medium) that can specify the balance of valuable value from the lending device that rents out the game ball to and from the gaming machine 1. ..

After that, when the display period of the forgotten caution image elapses, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the immersive caution image NG is displayed to be careful of excessive immersiveness in the game. Then, when the ending time of the third big hit game elapses, seven times are set as the second time reduction number (J2), the first hold number (U1) is "2", and the second hold number (U2) is ". The normal time saving game state is started in the state of "0", and the rush battle mode background image, the first right-handed image MG1 prompting to launch the game ball on the right side of the game area 5a, and the second time saving number of times (J2). The time-saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 7 times". Further, the number of games GK is displayed as "0". That is, the first time reduction number (J1), the third time reduction number (J3), and the remaining number of small hits (Z) are not displayed.

Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the first reserved number. The number in the display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the icon is instantly displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, because of the variable display of the first special symbol, the time-reduced remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the second time-reduced number (J2) maintains the state of "remaining 7 times". However, since the first special symbol is a variable display (variable effect), the rush battle reach effect is not executed.

At this time, when three game balls win a prize in the second starting port 47 and the second reserved number increases from "0" to "3", as shown in FIG. 75 (d), the second reserved number display area. The number on the 70th floor is increased from "0" to "3", and three white icons (holding icon HI) are additionally displayed in the second holding icon display area 70D.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the lost result (“513”). do. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

After that, when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 75 (f), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second reserved number. The number in the display area 70F is reduced from "3" to "2", and the three hold icon HIs displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is the corresponding one. It is displayed as an icon TI. In addition, the time-saving remaining number of times image KG changes from "remaining 7 times" to "6 times". In addition, the number of games GK is added by 1 to become "1".

Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state of forming a reach, and the normal reach effect is executed. Further, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the rush battle reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 battle is started, and the second hold icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are started. Is hidden (erased). At this time, a character image of "first battle" indicating the number of times the rush battle reach effect is executed is displayed.

At this time, two game balls win a prize in the second starting port 47, and the number of second holdings increases from "2" to "4", but the second holding icon display area 70D is hidden (erased). Therefore, the hold icon is not additionally displayed.

After that, when the final phase of the rush battle reach effect (execution timing of the decision effect of whether or not it is lost) is reached, the decision failure effect is started and the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3, and then FIG. 75 ( As shown in i), a character screen saying "defeat" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

After that, when the fluctuation time elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 75 (j), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with the lost result (“565”). do. Further, the second hold icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

After that, every time the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is started, the effects as shown in FIGS. 75 (f) to 75 (j) are repeatedly performed, and the time-saving remaining number image KG is generated each time. Along with the subtraction, the numbers in the character image indicating the number of executions of the rush battle reach effect will also be updated.

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving rush effect is executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that a normal time-saving game state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the right-handed notification is performed before the normal time-saving game state occurs (during the big hit game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by hitting the left side when a normal time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state is generated, an effect mode (here, a rush battle mode) is set according to the time-saving state at the end of the ending of the jackpot game regardless of whether or not there is a hold memory, and the effect is set. The background image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that a normal time-saving game state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal time saving game state is generated, the normal time saving rush effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ hidden. Therefore, it is possible to digest the time saving state with a new mood without worrying about the result of the previous fluctuation production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state is generated, a warning effect (display of a forgotten caution image TG, display of a immersive caution image NG) is performed to call attention to the player, and then an effect according to the time-saving state (display of a immersive caution image NG). Changes in the background image, display of the time-saving remaining number image KG, right-handed notification, variation effect according to the time-saving state, output of BGM corresponding to the rush battle mode, etc.) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively alert the player.

Further, at the start of the normal time saving game state, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode for the time saving state is audibly output even in the customer waiting state where there is no hold memory, but it is muted after a predetermined period elapses. The audible output is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect of the production is drastically reduced immediately even in the waiting state where there is no hold memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the customer is waiting at the start of the normal time-saving game state that has shifted from the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the production mode of the normal time-saving game state is muted without being audibly output. May be good. In this case, when the holding memory is generated by the game ball winning a prize at the start port from the customer waiting state and the variable effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode of the normal time-saving game state can be audibly output. good.

In addition, although the alerting effect is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, the alerting effect may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game to the normal time-saving game state, or immediately after the start of the normal time-saving state. The attention-calling effect may be performed (during the first fluctuation effect), or the forgotten caution image TG display and the immersive caution image NG display may be displayed in order in the attention-calling effect (either). May be displayed first).

Further, in the variation effect of the first special symbol executed when there is no second hold memory and the first hold memory is present at the start of the normal time saving game state, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is performed. However, it is possible to execute only the variable display of the special symbol TZ without executing the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that the second time reduction number (J2) is not subtracted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variation effect of the first special symbol executed when there is no second hold memory and the first hold memory is present at the start of the normal time saving game state, the special symbol TZ is executed without executing the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. When executing only the fluctuation display of, if there is a loss, the fluctuation effect is executed with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, shortened fluctuation or ultra-shortened fluctuation), and if it is a hit, the fluctuation time is longer than in the case of loss. You may make a special production.

In addition, although the right-handed notification is not performed during the time-saving rush effect, by displaying the first right-handed image MG1, the right-handed notification is always performed from the jackpot game to the normal time-saving game state. You may.

(Example of production when the final variable production of the rush battle mode is a big hit)
With reference to FIG. 76, an example of a production in which a big hit is obtained in the final fluctuation production of the rush battle mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol immediately before the final round in the rush battle mode has elapsed, and the second special symbol stops at the lost special symbol. When displayed, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the loss result (“676”). Further, the second hold icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol, which is the final round of the rush battle mode, is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started as shown in FIG. 76 (b). , The number in the second hold icon display area 70F is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two hold icon HIs displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. Then one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the time-saving final fluctuation causes the time-saving remaining number image KG to change from "1 remaining" to "last", and at the same time, storage that encourages right-handed storage of the second hold memory (increases the second hold number). The promotion image SG is displayed. This storage promotion image SG is an image that is displayed so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a as much as possible, and is a count image shorter than the time until the reach effect is started (here, "09"). : 99 ") is displayed, and a display that counts down with the passage of time is performed. In addition, the number of games GK is added by 1.

After that, when one game ball wins in the second starting port 47, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "1" to "2" as shown in FIG. 76 (c), and the second reserved number is displayed. A white icon (hold icon HI) is additionally displayed on the second display unit 70D2 of the icon display area 70D. Since the pre-reading result of the second reserved memory (special figure determination information) stored at this time is a big hit, the light emission effect at the time of winning is started, the top lamp 10b lights up in yellow, and the sound effect "picon" is emitted from the voice output device 9. ♪ ”is output.

Further, when two game balls are won in the second starting port 47, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "2" to "4" as shown in FIG. 76 (d), and the second reserved number is displayed. White icons (holding icon HI) are additionally displayed on the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4 of the icon display area 70D, respectively. In addition, the character "save by right-handed" in the second storage promotion image SG2 changes to "MAX !!" indicating that the upper limit ("4") of the second reserved number (U2) has been reached. After that, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), the count image of the storage promotion image SG becomes "00:00" and the countdown ends, and then the storage promotion image SG is deleted.

Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 76 (f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state of forming a reach, and the normal reach effect is executed. Further, when the predetermined time elapses, the development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 76 (g), the final battle reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 perform the final battle is started, and the second hold icon display area 70D And the icon display area 70C is hidden (erased). At this time, a character image of "final battle" indicating the number of times the battle reach effect is executed is displayed. In addition, the number of games GK is hidden as the development effect is executed.

After that, when the final phase of the special SP reach effect (execution timing of the decision effect of whether or not it is lost) is reached, the decision success effect is started and the ally character C2 launches the final attack on the enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and the voice output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin", and the final attack is sent to the enemy character. You will be notified that you have hit.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the effect position to the standby position and the successful effect is completed, a character image of "victory" is displayed and a big hit (small hit) is displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (i). In some cases), it is notified that it becomes. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. 76 (j), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the jackpot (“555”). do. Further, the second hold icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, in the final fluctuation effect in the normal time-saving game state, a storage promotion effect (display of storage promotion image SG, countdown display) that encourages right-handed storage of the second hold memory (increases the number of second hold). Is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the second reserved memory is stored before the time-saving gaming state ends, and it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a loss.

In addition, in the storage promotion effect, the countdown display is performed, so that the player can be strongly conscious of accumulating the second hold memory (increasing the number of the second hold) by hitting right, and the player loses. It becomes possible to suppress suffering from.

In addition, when the second reserved number (U2) reaches the upper limit in the storage promotion effect, the character "save by right-handed" indicates that the second reserved number (U2) has reached the upper limit ("" It is supposed to change to MAX !! "). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily firing the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the rush battle mode, which is the normal time-saving game state, when the change display of the last second special symbol that ends the normal time-saving game state is executed, the final battle reach effect is always executed. There is. Therefore, even when the normal time-saving game state ends due to a loss, the player can be sufficiently entertained and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the pre-reading result of the second reserved memory (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the second starting opening 47 is a small hit in the time-saving gaming state in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47 is easy. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect (look-ahead effect) at the time of winning, which targets the reserved memory that is the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the small hit game that may lead to the big hit game is executed in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the countdown display is executed in the storage promotion effect, the gauge image is displayed for a period shorter than the time until the reach effect is started, and the gauge length is shortened according to the passage of time. You may try to execute the display effect as if you were doing it. In addition, the specific light emitting means is turned on for a period shorter than the time until the reach effect is started, and the light emitting color is changed according to the passage of time (for example, blue lighting → yellow lighting → red lighting). You may try to perform a light emission effect.

(Example of production when the normal time saving game state ends)
An example of an effect in which the number of time reductions (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the normal time reduction gaming state ends will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

Here, along with the start of the loss variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation in the time saving, a series of effects that make it appear as if one variation effect is being executed over a plurality of variation displays has been started. As shown in a), it is assumed that the final battle reach production, which is a loss, is being executed.

After that, when the final phase of the final battle reach effect (execution timing of the decision effect of whether or not it is lost) is reached, the decision failure effect is started and the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3, and then FIG. 77 ( As shown in b), a character screen saying "defeat" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the decision failure effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 77 (c), a result display showing the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues from the first big hit game is displayed. Will be. Specifically, the number of executions of the jackpot game (here, "1 win") and the total number of payout balls (here, 450 pt) are displayed as the result of the match. In addition, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed when the reach is lost (“565”), and when the stop time elapses, the time-saving game state ends with four second reserved memories remaining, and the first game state is entered. The right-handed image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation effect of loss) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started, FIG. 77 (d). As shown in the above, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in the state where the result display is continued, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 69 (e), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss result (“749”). It should be noted that the game count GK remains hidden during the period when the result display is performed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the game count is only added internally and cannot be visually grasped. It is in a state.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed and the second variation display of the second special symbol (variation effect of loss) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started. As shown in FIG. 77 (f), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in a state where the result display is continued, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "3" to "2". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss result (“349”).

Further, when the stop time has elapsed and the third variation display of the second special symbol (variation effect of loss) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started. , The variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in the state where the result display is continued, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "2" to "1". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss.

After that, when the fourth (last) change display of the second special symbol (variation effect of loss) based on the remaining hold (second hold memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, the result display is displayed. The variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in the state where is continued, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 77 (h), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss (“749”), and when the stop time elapses, the result display ends and the above-mentioned series of effects is performed. Is finished.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started as shown in FIG. 77 (i), and the first reserved number display area 70E is started. The number of is reduced from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted to the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. To. At this time, the background image of the effect mode A corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, and the left-handed image HG prompting to launch the gaming ball is displayed on the left side of the gaming area 5a. In addition, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after addition.

In addition, although an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends in the rush battle mode is shown here, when the normal time-saving game state ends from any of the production modes of the random dance mode, the super random dance mode, and the infinite mode. Even if there is, basically, the progress is as shown in FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (i).

In this way, one variation effect is displayed from the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation in the time saving, to the variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold (second hold memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. A series of effects that make it look as if it is being executed are being executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience a novel effect that does not make the player strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in a series of effects, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. .. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize a plurality of variable effects as a series of effects, and it is possible to improve the effect of the series of effects.

In addition, by displaying the result from the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation in the time saving, to the variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. , It becomes easy to recognize a plurality of variable effects as a series of effects, and it is possible to improve the effect of the series of effects.

Further, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG that prompts the player to launch the game ball on the left side of the game area 5a at the transition to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by preventing the player from firing a useless game ball.

It should be noted that a series of effects are executed from the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation in the time saving, to the variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. However, in the change display of the second special symbol, which is the final change in time reduction, the second special based on the remaining hold (second hold memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state without starting a series of effects. A series of effects may be executed over the variable display of the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to perform a special SP reach effect or a result display in the variable display of the first second special symbol based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state.

(Production example 1 when a small hit is made with the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state)
FIG. 78 will be described as an effect example 1 in which a small hit is made in the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state.

Here, along with the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation in the time saving, a series of effects that make it appear as if one variation effect is being executed over a plurality of variation displays is started, and FIG. 78 (a). ), It is assumed that the final battle reach production that is a loss is being executed. At this time, the light emitting effect at the time of winning, which targets the second reserved storage (small hit) as the second notice, continues, and the top lamp 10b is in a state of emitting yellow light.

After that, when the final phase of the final battle reach effect (execution timing of the decision effect of whether or not it is lost) is reached, the decision failure effect is started and the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3, and then FIG. 78 ( As shown in b), a character screen saying "defeat" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the determination failure effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the short-time game state continues from the first small hit game or the big hit game is shown. The result is displayed. Specifically, the number of executions of the jackpot game (here, "1 win") and the total number of payout balls (here, 450 pt) are displayed as the result of the match. In addition, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the reach loss result (“565”).

However, since the remaining hold (second hold memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a small hit, the result display executed here is at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a special result display (a kind of look-ahead effect) that suggests that a small hit is included in the remaining hold (second hold memory) of the second special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of star images YG are displayed at positions avoiding the character image of the result display. Then, when the stop time elapses, the normal time-saving gaming state ends with four second reserved memories remaining, the game shifts to the normal gaming state, and the first right-handed image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation effect of loss) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started, FIG. 78 (d). As shown in the above, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in the state where the result display is continued, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 78 (e), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss result (“749”). It should be noted that the game count GK remains hidden during the period when the result display is performed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the game count is only added internally and cannot be visually grasped. It is in a state.

Then, when the second variation display of the second special symbol (variation effect of the small hit) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started, FIG. 78 (f). ), The variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "3" to "2". At this time, the revival effect is started, the character image "Still more!" Is displayed, and then the ally character C2 counterattacks the enemy character C3.

Then, when the ally character C2 launches the final attack, as shown in FIG. 78 (g), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and the voice output device 9 announces "cue-in-kyuin". Is output (here, it is notified that the variation display of the second special symbol this time is a small hit). At this time, the top lamp 10b is turned off and the light emission effect at the time of winning is completed.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the effect position to the standby position and the revival effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at a special roll (“555”) common to the small hit and the big hit, and temporarily stops. After a lapse of time, as shown in FIG. 78 (h), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a special roll (“555”) common to the small hit and the big hit, and the special symbol TZ indicates the small hit “V”. ”Is included in the small hit (“5V5 ”) to stop and display. In addition, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after addition.

Then, when the stop time elapses, the series of effects described above ends, the opening of the small hit game is started, and as shown in FIG. 78 (i), a "BONUS" image indicating that the small hit game is executed is displayed. At the same time, the first right-handed image MG1 prompting to launch the game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a.

After that, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 78 (j), the second right-handed image MG2 prompting to launch the game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a instead of the "BONUS" image.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "big hit" image indicating that the jackpot game is executed is displayed, and a game ball is fired on the right side of the game area 5a. The urging first right-handed image MG1 is displayed. After that, when the predetermined time elapses, the second right-handed image MG2 prompting to launch the game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a instead of the "big hit" image.

In this way, when the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a pre-reading result that is a small hit. It is possible to execute a special result display (look-ahead effect) that confirms that it will be a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security while giving the player a sense of loss by displaying the result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a small hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (the second hold memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state, the hit is a big hit. The first movable member 73a operates in the same manner as in the case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce that the small hit game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a small hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (the second hold memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state, the hit is a big hit. The same notification sound (“Kyuinkyuin”) as in the case is output from the voice output device 9. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce that the small hit game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second hold storage stored during the specific gaming state) is a small hit, the effect symbol 70a As a big hit, the same roll (a special roll in which three same numbers are lined up) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make people aware that the small hit game leads to the big hit game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special result display is executed when a small hit is included in the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state. However, even if a big hit is included in the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state, the special result display in the same display mode as the small hit is displayed. May be executed. Further, the special result display of the display mode different from the case of the small hit and the case of the big hit may be executed.

In addition, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage stored during the specific gaming state) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state, the effect symbol 70a As in the case of a big hit, the same roll (a special roll in which three same numbers are lined up) is displayed, but even with the same roll, the color of the number is different, or a specific image (specific image) is displayed on the number. It may be different whether or not to add characters and decorative images).

In addition, when a small hit is included in the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state, the small hit game (=). The same special result display is performed regardless of the type of the stop special figure data), but a different mode of special result display may be performed depending on the type of the small hit game.

(Production example 2 when a small hit is made with the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state)
FIG. 79 will be described as an effect example 2 in which a small hit is made in the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state.

Here, along with the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation in the time saving, a series of effects that make it appear as if one variation effect is being executed over a plurality of variation displays is started, and FIG. 79 (a). ), It is assumed that the final battle reach production that is a loss is being executed. At this time, the light emitting effect at the time of winning, which targets the second reserved storage (small hit) as the second notice, continues, and the top lamp 10b is in a state of emitting yellow light.

After that, when the final phase of the final battle reach effect (execution timing of the effect of determining whether or not there is a loss) is reached, the pre-reading determination success effect is started, and the effect that the ally character C2 launches the final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and the voice output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "cue-in-cure" (here, after this). It is notified that the variation display of the second special symbol executed second of the above is a small hit).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the effect position to the standby position and the successful effect is completed, a character image of "victory" is displayed and a small hit or a big hit is displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (c). Will be notified. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 79 (d), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the reach loss result (“565”) while the display of the character image “victory” is continued. Then, when the stop time elapses, the time-saving gaming state ends with four second reserved memories remaining, the game shifts to the normal gaming state, and the first right-handed image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started, FIG. 79 (e). As shown in, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the display of the character image of "victory" is continued, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3". ..

Next, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 79 (f), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a missed result (“938”) while the display of the character image “victory” continues. .. After that, when the stop time elapses, the second variation display (variation display of small hits) of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started. As shown in FIG. 79 (g), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in a state where the display of the character image of "victory" is continued, and the numbers in the second reserved number display area 70F are changed from "3" to "2". It decreases to.

After that, when the fluctuation time elapses, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at a special roll (“555”) common to the small hit and the big hit, and when the temporary stop time elapses, the effect is as shown in FIG. 79 (h). The symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at a special roll (“555”) common to the small hit and the big hit, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the small hit roll (“5V5”) including the “V” indicating the small hit. .. In addition, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the stop time elapses, the series of effects described above ends, the opening of the small hit game is started, and as shown in FIG. 79 (i), a "BONUS" image indicating that the small hit game is executed is displayed. At the same time, the first right-handed image MG1 prompting to launch the game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a. After that, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 79 (j), the second right-handed image MG2 prompting to launch the game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a instead of the “BONUS” image.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "big hit" image indicating that the jackpot game is executed is displayed, and a game ball is fired on the right side of the game area 5a. The urging first right-handed image MG1 is displayed. After that, when the predetermined time elapses, the second right-handed image MG2 prompting to launch the game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a instead of the "big hit" image.

In this way, even if the final variation effect of the time-saving gaming state is lost when the variation effect related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is a small hit or a big hit, the look-ahead As a kind of production, a battle production (successful production of pre-reading decision) that confirms victory is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected fluctuation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production mode of the opening effect when the small hit game is executed is different from the production mode of the opening effect when the big hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the game is a small hit game or a big hit game from the opening effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In FIGS. 78 and 79, the contents of the variable effect when the small hit game is executed and when the big hit game is executed are the same, but the small hit game is executed and the big hit game is executed. The production content of the variable effect when is executed may be different. In this case, the time during which the first movable member 73a is in the production position may be different depending on whether the small hit game is executed or the big hit game is executed, and the light emitting mode of the first movable member 73a may be changed. You may make it different.

(Example of production when a small hit game is executed in super-random dance mode)
An example of an effect when a small hit game is executed in the super-random dance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 80.

Here, as a result of the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol executed in the super-random dance mode, the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small hit game is started, and the first small hit game is started. It is assumed that the opening has started.

When the opening of the first small hit game is completed and the opening / closing game for changing the state of the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the specific area opening / closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. The third right-handed image MG3 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at 53 is displayed, and the limit notification effect according to the remaining period of the opening / closing game (the remaining time that the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. It will be started. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size is expanded while counting down with the passage of time. Is done. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small hit game.

When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at the timing immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the passage notification effect indicating that the game ball has passed (entered) the specific area 53 starts. Will be done. Specifically, the passage notification image TH composed of the letters "V" is displayed, and the passage notification sound "vacuum ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), until the end timing of the opening / closing game (state conversion of the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the specific area opening / closing member 52), that is, until the small hit game (conversion game) is completed. The passage notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small hit game is completed and the opening of the big hit game (first V big hit game) is started, the big hit game (first V big hit game) is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (d). A "V-BONUS" image is displayed. Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 80 (e), the round game is started and the big hit middle effect is executed. In addition, the total number of payout balls "660 pt" according to the total number of game media paid out during the small hit game is displayed, and every time the game ball wins in the second big prize opening 56 during the first V big hit game, the total number is displayed. The number of payout balls is updated.

On the other hand, when a predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) elapses without the game ball passing (winning) the specific area 53 after the start of the small hit game, the count image CG becomes "01" as shown in FIG. 80 (f). : 99 ”and is displayed in a size larger than that in FIG. 80 (a). When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at the timing immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the above-mentioned passage notification effect is started, the passage notification image TH is displayed, and the sound is output. The passage notification sound "vacuum ♪" is output from the device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), until the end timing of the opening / closing game (state conversion of the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the specific area opening / closing member 52), that is, until the small hit game (conversion game) is completed. The passage notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small hit game is completed and the opening of the big hit game (first V big hit game) is started, the big hit game (first V big hit game) is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (d). A "V-BONUS" image is displayed. Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 80 (e), the round game is started and the big hit middle effect is executed. In addition, the total number of payout balls "660 pt" according to the total number of game media paid out during the small hit game is displayed, and every time the game ball wins in the second big prize opening 56 during the first V big hit game, the total number is displayed. The number of payout balls is updated.

Further, when the remaining time of the opening / closing game becomes "0" without the game ball passing through (winning) the specific area 53, it is displayed in a size larger than that of FIG. 80 (f) as shown in FIG. 80 (g). The count image CG is set to "00:00". In addition, in the ending of the first small hit game, a disappointing notification effect for notifying that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small hit game (more specifically, during the opening / closing game) is executed, and "sorry". A character image and a fainted character are displayed, and a disappointing sound effect "Chi-n" is output from the voice output device 9.

After that, when the ending of the first small hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 80 (h), the remaining number of small hits (Z) is subtracted to one, and the effect mode is the super-random dance mode or infinite. Rank down from mode to random dance mode. Then, the background of the random dance mode corresponding to the random dance mode is displayed, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are redisplayed. Further, the second hold icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the time saving remaining number image KG is also redisplayed. In addition, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 80 (i), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second reserved number. The number in the display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3", and the four hold icon HIs displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is the corresponding one. It is displayed as an icon TI. In addition, the time-saving remaining number of times image KG changes from "remaining 80 times" to "79 times". In addition, the number of games GK is added by 1.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 in the small hit game (more specifically, the opening / closing game), the passage notification effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 is executed. There is. Therefore, even if it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the first big winning opening 50 (around the specific area 53), the player can surely confirm that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (the big hit game is executed). It is possible to grasp and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 in the small hit game (more specifically, the opening / closing game), the small hit game (more specifically, the opening / closing game) is performed regardless of the timing of passing through the specific area 53. The passage notification effect continues until the end. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player cannot detect the passage notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the small hit game (conversion game), the limit notification effect according to the remaining time of the opening / closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately urge the player to launch the game ball so as to pass through the specific area 53, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of missing the chance to win the jackpot game.

In addition, the notification mode (count number, count image size) of the limit notification effect according to the remaining time of the opening / closing game (remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is (highly appealing to the player). It is supposed to change. Therefore, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player with the passage of time, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of losing the chance to win the jackpot game.

In addition, in the limit notification effect, a countdown display is performed so that the remaining time of the opening / closing game can be specified, so that the player can accurately grasp the time when there is a chance to win the jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible to improve.

Further, in the small hit game (conversion game), when the execution period of the opening / closing game elapses without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the game ball is specified during the small hit game (more specifically, during the opening / closing game). A regrettable notification effect for notifying that the region 53 has not been passed is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the big hit game could not be acquired, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player feels dissatisfied because the result of the small hit game becomes unknown.

Further, in the small hit game (opening / closing game) executed as a result of the fluctuation effect (variation display of the special symbol) executed in the super-random dance mode (the same applies to the infinite mode), the game ball passes through the specific area 53. When the small hit game ends after the execution period of the open / close game has elapsed, the remaining number of small hits is 1 because the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1 when the special small hit symbol is stopped. It is designed to be ranked down to the corresponding random dance mode. Therefore, by setting the production mode according to the remaining number of small hits, when the big hit game or the small hit game is executed after that, the player's recognition and the game conditions that are not inconsistent are set, and the game is set. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, even when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small hit game executed during the time reduction game state, the remaining number of small hits (Z) is not "0" (the time reduction number is also "0"). If not), the time-saving game state will continue. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be launched during the small hit game due to a malfunction of the launcher or a ball jam, the player does not suffer an extreme disadvantage and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Although the limit notification effect is set according to the remaining period of the opening / closing game, it may be set according to the remaining time until the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 is finally closed, or the small hit game. It may be produced according to the remaining time of.

In addition, although the countdown display is executed as a limit notification effect, the gauge image is displayed for the remaining period of the opening / closing game, and the gauge length is shortened according to the passage of time. You may want to do it. In addition, a specific light emitting means is turned on for the remaining period of the opening / closing game, and a light emitting effect such as changing the light emitting color according to the passage of time (for example, blue lighting → yellow lighting → red lighting) is executed. You may.

Further, in the small hit game executed during the time-saving game state, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 but the time-saving game state is continued, the time-saving remaining number image KG can grasp the remaining number of times ( Although it is displayed with the remaining number of times (80 times, etc.), it may be displayed so that the remaining number of times cannot be grasped (becomes unknown), such as "???".

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small hit game executed during the time-saving game state, but the time-saving game state is continued, a character image such as "may be in random dance mode" is displayed. In, a suggestion effect suggesting that the super-random dance mode or the infinite mode does not continue may be executed.

(Example of production when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of the small hit game in the random dance mode)
An example of an effect in which the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of the small hit game in the random dance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

Here, as a result of the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol executed in the random dance mode, the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small hit game is started, and the opening of the first small hit game is started. Suppose that has been started. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small hit game.

When the opening of the first small hit game is completed and the opening / closing game for changing the state of the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the specific area opening / closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the specific area The third right-handed image MG3 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at 53 is displayed, and the limit notification effect according to the remaining period of the opening / closing game (the remaining time that the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. It will be started. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size is expanded while counting down with the passage of time. Is done.

After that, when the remaining time of the opening / closing game becomes "0" without the game ball passing through (winning) the specific area 53, it is displayed in a size larger than that of FIG. 81 (a) as shown in FIG. 81 (c). The count image CG is set to "00:00". In addition, in the ending of the first small hit game, a disappointing notification effect for notifying that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small hit game (more specifically, during the opening / closing game) is executed, and "sorry". A character image and a fainted character are displayed, and a disappointing sound effect "Chi-n" is output from the voice output device 9.

Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), the end suggestion effect suggesting that the time-saving gaming state ends is executed. Specifically, the shutter image SY is closed so as to shield the background image, the "sorry" character image, and the fainted character, and when the ending period ends, a small hit is performed as shown in FIG. 81 (d). The special symbol TZ "5V5" of the embodiment is redisplayed, and the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F are redisplayed.

After that, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started, FIG. 81 (e). As shown in, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in the continuous state where the shutter image SY (shielded image) is displayed, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3". do. It should be noted that the game count GK remains hidden during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if the variation effect is executed, the game count is only added internally, and it is visually grasped. It is in a state where it cannot be done.

It should be noted that the period during which the variable display based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period during which the shutter image SY is displayed, is a jackpot notice effect or pre-reading. The production is not executed.

Further, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 81 (f), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a loss (“346”) in a continuous state in which the shutter image SY (shielded image) is displayed. .. After that, the fluctuation display and stop of the special symbol TZ in the state where the shutter image SY (shielded image) is displayed until the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0. The display is repeated.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol TZ when the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state becomes 0, the shutter image is as shown in FIG. 81 (g). In the continuous state where the SY (shielded image) is displayed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a missed result (“559”).

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ elapses, as shown in FIG. 81 (h), the shutter image SY (shielded image) disappears, the effect mode A background image is displayed, and the first hold icon display area is displayed. 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-handed image HG prompting to launch a game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. In addition, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after addition.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining hold of the first special symbol (first hold storage) is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area is started. The number of 70E is reduced from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Will be done.

In this way, in the small hit game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) executed in the random dance mode (including the case of the rush battle mode), the game ball covers the specific area 53. When the execution period of the opening / closing game elapses without passing and the small hit game ends, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 0 when the small hit special symbol is stopped, and the time saving game state ends, which is normal. It is designed to be ranked down to the effect mode A corresponding to the gaming state (notifying that it is in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the game state is set so that there is no discrepancy with the recognition of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the small hit game, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the execution period of the opening / closing game elapses and the small hit game ends (the time-saving game state is not continued), the normal game state is used. The result display is not executed before it is notified that there is something (various effect images corresponding to the effect mode A are displayed). Therefore, the game can be advanced without giving a feeling of loss that the jackpot game and the time-saving game state have been missed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, one variation effect is executed from the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation in the time saving, to the variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold (second hold memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. A series of productions that make it look as if it is being done are being executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience a novel effect that does not make the player strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in a series of effects, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. .. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize a plurality of variable effects as a series of effects, and it is possible to improve the effect of the series of effects.

Further, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG that prompts the player to launch the game ball on the left side of the game area 5a at the transition to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by preventing the player from firing a useless game ball.

It should be noted that the period during which the variable display based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period during which the shutter image SY is displayed, is a jackpot notice effect or pre-reading. Instead of setting the effect not to be executed, the execution of the jackpot advance notice effect may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead effect may be restricted, or vice versa. In addition, the execution of a specific notice effect (for example, a winning decision effect, a big hit confirmation effect, etc.) among the jackpot advance notice effects is permitted, and other notice effects (for example, a dialogue notice effect, a roulette notice effect, a cut-in notice effect, etc.) are allowed. ) May be restricted, or the execution of a specific effect among the look-ahead effects (for example, a light emission effect at the time of winning) is permitted, and other effects (for example, a look-ahead zone effect or a look-ahead countdown effect) are allowed. Etc.) may be regulated.

(Example of production when special time-saving production is executed)
An example of an effect in which a special time-saving effect is executed due to the fact that the RWM clear is not performed at the start of power supply will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In addition, the special time saving system production includes the RWM clear denial effect suggesting that the RWM clear is not performed (deferred), the activation counter display suggesting the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time saving game state, and the like. Be done.

Here, the power supply is stopped (power off) and the power supply is restarted (power off) during the normal game state in which the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed 395 times after the end of the jackpot game. It is assumed that the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed 48 times after the control state of the game is restored when the power is turned on.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal game state (effect mode A) as the 49th variation display of the special symbol after the restart of the power supply (restoration of the control state of the game). The variation display (variation effect) has started, "2" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, and the first hold icon display area is displayed. Two hold icon HIs are displayed in 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. In addition, 49 times are displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("814". ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

After that, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the variation display of the special symbol which is the 50th time after the restart of the power supply and the remaining 100 times or less until the special time saving gaming state is started, FIG. As shown in c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the number of the first reserved number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the first reserved icon display area 70B is displayed. The two displayed hold icon HIs are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 49 to 50.

At this time, if it is determined to perform the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the deferred notification character SC is displayed as the RWM clear denial effect, and the special time reduction is displayed as the activation counter display. The notification logo LG including the characters "help time" indicating the game state and the character image "remaining 66" indicating the remaining number of fluctuations are displayed. Further, the game ball wins in the first start opening 45, the first hold number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and the hold icon HI is additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82 (e), the stationary notification character SC and the activation counter display are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the effect symbol 70a. To.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 82 (f), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("624"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 65".

Further, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 51st variation display of the special symbol after the restart of the power supply, as shown in FIG. 82 (g), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed. The variable display of the symbol TZ is started, the number in the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are the icons. A shift display is made toward the display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 50 to 51.

Then, the variation display (variation effect) and the stop display of the first special symbol are repeatedly performed, and the variation display of the special symbol, which is the 60th time after the restart of the power supply and the 10th time from the start of the RWM clear negative effect. As a result, when the stop display is performed with the lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 82 (h), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the loss result (“294”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 55", and the deferred notification character SC executed over 10 variable displays is displayed. It is erased and the execution of the RWM clear denial effect ends.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed 50 times after the restart of the power supply (restoration of the control state of the game) and the remaining 100 times or less until the special time-saving game state is performed, the RWM clear denial effect is executed. If it is not determined, when the 100th change display of the special symbol is performed after the power supply is restarted, the RWM clear denial effect is executed on condition that the special time-saving game state is not set (normal game state). Will be decided.

In addition, it is decided to execute the activation counter display when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed, which is the 50th time after the restart of the power supply (restoration of the control state of the game) and the remaining 100 times or less until the special time saving game state. If not, when the 100th change display of the special symbol is performed after the power supply is restarted, it is decided to execute the activation counter display on the condition that it is not in the special time-saving game state (normal game state). Will be done.

In this way, if the RWM is not cleared at the start of power supply, the RWM clear is denied during the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the special symbol, which is the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) from the restart of power supply. The effect (display of the stationary notification character SC) is executed. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to visually grasp that the RWM is not cleared and the player is in a stationary state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the RWM clear denial effect is executed from the start of the RWM clear denial effect until the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times (here, 10 times). Therefore, even if it is overlooked that the RWM clear denial effect has been started, it is possible to surely inform the player that the RWM clear denial effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, if the RWM is not cleared at the start of power supply, the activation counter is displayed (special) during the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the special symbol, which is the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) from the restart of power supply. The notification logo LG including the characters "help time" meaning the time-saving game state and the character image "remaining 66" indicating the remaining number of fluctuations are displayed). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times of variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol until the transition to the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the character image showing the remaining number of fluctuations as the activation counter display is only a number and does not include a unit display such as the number of times or the number of times. Therefore, it is more likely that the player will find out what this number means, and by increasing the chances of seeing the model information, it is possible to deepen the understanding of the gaming machine and promote the interest of the game. It will be possible to improve.

In addition, the character image showing the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is not at the start of the fluctuation effect where the jackpot notice effect or look-ahead effect is likely to be executed (started), but at the start of the change effect, the jackpot notice effect or look-ahead effect is executed. It is updated when the stop display of the effect symbol that is difficult to (start) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the execution timing of the RWM clear denial effect and the execution timing of the activation counter display are set at the same time (the 50th or 100th time from the restart of the power supply). Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the transition time to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the execution timing of the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display is during the change display (variation effect) of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after the restart of the power supply (restoration of the control state of the game). However, the RWM clear negative effect and the activation counter display should be executed during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol before the predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times or 100 times before) to shift to the special time saving game state. Alternatively, one of the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display may be displayed as a variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after the restart of power supply (restoration of the control state of the game). ) May be set, and the other may be set to the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol before a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times or 100 times before) to shift to the special time saving gaming state. In such a case, it may be executed at a predetermined ratio 50 times before the transition to the special time-saving game state, and if it has not been executed 50 times before, it may be executed 100 times before.

(Example of production when waiting for customers when shifting to the special time saving game state)
FIG. 83 will be described with reference to an example of an effect in which a customer waiting state is set when the game shifts to the special time saving game state.

Here, it is assumed that the 496th variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol has been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the activation counter display has already been executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has been started as the variation display of the 497th special symbol since the end of the jackpot game, and the first reserved number display area 70E. "3" is displayed, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, three hold icon HIs are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is displayed. The icon TI is displayed. In addition, 112 times are displayed as the number of games GK, and the activation counter display is "4 remaining".

At this time, as shown in FIG. 83A, the countdown effect is started when the number of remaining fluctuations until the special time-saving gaming state is set to 3 times according to the start of the variation effect, and the remaining 3 times are shown. The number image of "3" is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("814". ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 3".

Further, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 498th variation display of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display of is started, the number of the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "2", and the three hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are the icon display areas. Shift display toward 70C and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 112 to 113, and a numerical image of "2" indicating the remaining two is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("594"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 2".

After that, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 499th variation display of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 83 (e), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display of is started, the number of the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are the icon display areas. Shift display toward 70C and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 113 to 114, and a numerical image of "1" indicating the remaining one is displayed as a countdown effect.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("634"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 1".

Then, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 500th variation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 83 (g), the effect symbol 70a And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number of the first hold icon display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is changed. It is shifted to the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 114 times to 115 times, and a numerical image of "0" indicating the remaining 0 times is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 83 (h), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("234"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "0 remaining". Further, since the special time-saving gaming state is started by the stop display of the lost special symbol, the first right-handed image MG1 prompting to launch the gaming ball is displayed on the right side of the gaming area 5a in the upper right corner of the screen.

Further, when the stop time of the first special symbol elapses, as shown in FIG. 83 (i), the customer waiting state is started because the hold storage is "0", which corresponds to the normal gaming state. The display of the mode A background image and the activation counter display is maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demo production is started as shown in FIG. 83 (j), and the help time, which is the name of the special time saving game state, is installed. A guidance image AN indicating that "help time is installed" is displayed. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect elapses, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 83 (i), and the state and the figure of FIG. It will repeatedly shift to the state of 83 (j).

In this way, the countdown effect suggesting the transition from the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol before the predetermined number of times (here, 3 times) before the transition to the special time-saving game state is executed. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the time when the special time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the 500th fluctuation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, is entered into the special time-saving game state, that is, the stop time of the special symbol. Right-handed notification is performed by the first right-handed image MG1 from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to hit the right side as soon as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the 500th special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, is entered into the special time saving game state, the effect mode is the special time saving game. It is waiting to shift to the infinite mode corresponding to the state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in visually recognizing the stop display of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the special time-saving game state is reached, if the customer is waiting, the activation counter display is maintained, so that the game progresses, for example, when the player leaves the seat and returns. It is possible to inform the player of what kind of state the game is in, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a guidance image AN indicating that the help time, which is the name of the special time-saving game state, is installed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, is displayed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that excessive investment can be suppressed and relief can be received due to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the guidance image AN that says "help time is installed" during the entire period during the customer waiting demo production, for example, a demo display of model guidance (various productions, character introductions, etc.) is performed. The guide image AN may be displayed while the model name is being displayed without displaying the guide image AN, or vice versa. Even in this case, it is preferable not to display the guide image AN while the manufacturer name is being displayed.

Further, instead of displaying the guidance image AN indicating "equipped with help time" on the image display device, the surface of the game board (which may be inside or outside the game area) or the glass frame 4 It may be written as "help time installed" on a part of the image display device, and a guide image AN saying "help time installed" is displayed on the image display device, and the surface of the game board or a part of the glass frame 4 etc. May be written as "equipped with help time".

(Example of effect when variable effect is executed after transition to special time saving game state)
An example of an effect in which a variable effect is executed after the transition from the effect mode A to the special time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

Here, as a result of the change display of the special symbol for the 500th time from the end of the jackpot game, the stop display of the lost special symbol is performed and the special time-saving game state is generated, and the right-handed notification by the first right-handed image MG1 is generated. It shall be done.

In that state, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 and the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the first variation display in the special time-saving gaming state, the variation is as shown in FIG. 84 (a). The effect is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. In addition, the number of games GK is increased from 115 to 116.

After that, when the variation display of the second special symbol is lost, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the variation effect pattern dedicated to the rush effect is determined and the rush effect in the special time-saving gaming state (here, long). Rush production) is executed. Specifically, the notification logo LG of the activation counter display displayed at the lower right of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and enlarged and displayed, and a character image of "START" indicating the start of the special time saving game state is displayed. Then, the fourth right-handed image MG4 having a size larger than that of the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), a blackout effect in which the screen is shielded by a dark color image is executed, and when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from that, a blackout effect is executed. , As shown in FIG. 84 (d), the infinite mode entry display suggesting that the infinite mode corresponding to the special time saving gaming state is entered is performed.

After that, when the display time of the infinite mode rush display elapses and the rush effect of the special time reduction game state ends, the rush effect diagram of the special time reduction game state ends, the infinite mode background image and the second time reduction number (J2). The time-saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 749 times". In addition, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("234"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 84 (f), the activation counter display is erased and the rush effect of the special time saving game state is not executed, and the normal game is performed. The effect of the effect mode A corresponding to the state (display of the background image of mode A, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when the left effect symbol 70a temporarily stops "3" after a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 84 (g), the right effect symbol 70a also reaches to incite whether or not "3" stops. When the fanning effect is performed and the reach fanning effect period elapses, as shown in FIG. 84 (h), the reach state is formed and the character image "completed" indicating that the reach state is completed is displayed. After that, the middle symbol immediately temporarily stops at "3".

Then, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. 84 (i), the effect symbol 70a is a special outcome common to the small hit and the jackpot. ("333") is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the jackpot ("333") indicating a jackpot, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

If the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit as the first variation display in the special time-saving game state, basically, the effect is as shown in FIGS. 84 (f) to 84 (i). However, the roll that is stopped and displayed as a special symbol TZ is a small hit roll (“3V3”).

Further, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the initial variable display in the special time-saving game state, the effect basically changes as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (i). Will be done.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the specified number of times (500 times) after the end of the jackpot game and the game shifts to the special time-saving game state, the variable effect dedicated to the rush effect is produced. The pattern is decided and it is possible to execute the rush effect (long rush effect) in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special time-saving game state has been reached, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the infinite mode rush effect is executed after the blackout effect in which the screen is shielded by the dark color image (shielded image) is executed as the rush effect in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the transition from the normal gaming state to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state can be performed without discomfort, and the player can be made aware of the transition to the special time-saving gaming state, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, with the start of the first variation display of the special symbol in the special time-saving game state, the right-handed notification by the fourth right-handed image MG4 is performed (during the blackout effect and the infinite mode entry effect). ing. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the special time-saving game state can grasp that he / she makes a right-handed hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is executed in an effect mode different from the case of shifting to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that a time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state has occurred, and to notify the player that a special time-saving game state has occurred in a novel manner. It will be possible to improve.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol after the transition to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling lost due to the fact that the player has been hit by haste even though the game has shifted to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol after shifting to the special time-saving game state is a big hit or a small hit, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is not executed, but it is the same as the case of loss. In addition, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state may be executed.

In addition, if the first special symbol variation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state is the variation display of the first special symbol, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is executed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. In the case of, the rush effect of the special time saving game state may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the rush effect of the special time-saving game state during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol after shifting to the special time-saving game state, in the normal game state which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol may be set longer than the normal stop display period, and the rush effect of the special time-saving gaming state may be executed in the stop display period. In this case, instead of setting the effect mode to the infinite mode by the end of the rush effect, the effect mode may be set to the infinite mode by starting the variable display (variable effect) of the next special symbol.

(Example of production when the countdown mode is executed)
An example of an effect in which the countdown mode is executed due to the RWM clearing at the start of power supply will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The countdown mode is set when the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving gaming state is a predetermined number (here, 50 times) in the normal gaming state, and the transition to the special time-saving gaming state is performed. This is a production mode that displays a countdown to make you expect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 85A, the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state (effect mode A) is performed as the variation display of the 450th special symbol after the RWM clearing performed at the start of power supply. (Variation effect) has started, "4" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area, and 4 is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. One hold icon HI is displayed, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. In addition, 450 times are displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("814". ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

After that, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 450th variation display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared at the start of the power supply, as shown in FIG. 85 (c). The variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the number of the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3", and the four hold displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. The icon HI is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 450 to 451.

At this time, since the activation condition of the countdown mode of 50 times until the special time-saving game state is satisfied, the introduction effect of the countdown mode is executed as shown in FIG. 85 (d). Specifically, the door image TO (shielded image) is closed so as to shield the background image, various icons, etc., and as shown in FIG. 85 (e), "infinite if the countdown mode entry count is 0". The text image "Enter mode" is displayed.

Then, when the mode shifts to the countdown mode, as shown in FIG. 85 (f), the door image TO disappears, the countdown mode background image is displayed, and the countdown mode is suggested (notified) at the lower right of the screen. The countdown mode icon IC is displayed, and a character image of "49 remaining" indicating the remaining 49 times as a countdown display CD is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Further, the effect symbol 70a changes from a display mode including characters and numbers to a display mode containing only numbers.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 85 (g), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("673"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (h), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area 70E is started. The number of is reduced from "3" to "2", and the three hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is used as the icon TI. Is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 451 to 452, and the countdown display CD is subtracted from "48 remaining" indicating the remaining 48 times.

Then, the variation display (variation effect) and the stop display of the first special symbol are repeatedly performed, and the variation time of the first special symbol, which is the 496th time after the RWM is cleared, has passed and the first special symbol is a lost special symbol. When the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 85 (i), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with a loss result (“175”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted. At this time, the number of games GK is displayed as "496 times", and the countdown display CD is displayed as "remaining 4" indicating the remaining 4 times.

After that, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 497th variation display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. 86 (j), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number of the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3", and the four hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are the icon display area 70C. One is displayed as the icon TI in a shift display toward. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 496 times to 497 times, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "remaining 3", and the remaining fluctuation until the special time saving game state is reached according to the start of the fluctuation production. When the number of times reaches three, the countdown effect is started, and the character image of "3" indicating the remaining three times is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 86 (k), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("763"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Further, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 498th variation display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. 86 (l), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number of the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "2", and the three hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are the icon display area 70C. One is displayed as the icon TI in a shift display toward. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 497 times to 498 times, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "remaining 2", and a character image of "2" indicating the remaining 2 times is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 86 (m), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("813"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

After that, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 499th variation display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. 86 (n), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number of the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are the icon display area 70C. One is displayed as the icon TI in a shift display toward. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 498 times to 499 times, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "remaining 1", and a character image of "1" indicating the remaining 1 time is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 86 (o), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost (“273). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Further, when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 500th variation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. 86 (p), the effect symbols 70a and The variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first hold number display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is the relevant one. It is shifted to the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 499 times to 500 times, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "remaining 0", and a numerical image of "0" indicating the remaining 0 times is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 86 (q), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("134"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted. Since the special time-saving gaming state is started by the stop display of the loss special symbol, the first right-handed image MG1 prompting to launch the game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a in the right-handed corner of the screen.

Further, when the stop time of the first special symbol elapses, as shown in FIG. 86 (r), the customer waiting state is started because the hold storage is “0”, which corresponds to the normal gaming state. Mode A The background image and countdown display are maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demo production is started as shown in FIG. 86 (s), and the help time, which is the name of the special time saving game state, is installed. A guidance image AN indicating that "help time is installed" is displayed. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demo effect elapses, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 86 (r), and the state and the figure of FIG. It will repeatedly shift to the state of 86 (s).

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this case) before the transition to the special time-saving gaming state, the countdown mode is changed from any of the effect modes A to C corresponding to the normal gaming state. It is designed to be migrated. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that it is an opportunity to shift to the special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also in the countdown mode, a countdown effect suggesting that the special symbol changes from the variable display (variable effect) before the predetermined number of times (here, 3 times) to the special time-saving game state is executed. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the time when the special time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the 500th variation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the special time-saving gaming state is reached, that is, during the stop time of the special symbol. The first right-handed image MG1 is used for right-handed notification. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to hit the right side as soon as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the 500th variation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the effect mode is set to the special time-saving gaming state. It is waiting to shift to the infinite mode corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in visually recognizing the stop display of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the game is in a special time-saving game state, if the customer is waiting, the countdown display will be maintained. Therefore, for example, how the game progresses when the player leaves the seat and returns. It is possible to inform the player of the state of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the countdown display is subtracted at the start of the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol, it may be subtracted at the stop display of the special symbol.

(Example of effect when variable effect is executed after transition to special time saving game state)
An example of an effect in which the variable effect is executed after the transition from the countdown mode to the special time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

Here, as a result of the 500th variation display of the special symbol after clearing the RWM, the stop display of the lost special symbol is performed and a special time-saving gaming state is generated, and the right-handed notification is performed by the first right-handed image MG1. It is assumed that it has been damaged.

In that state, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 and the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the first variation display in the special time-saving gaming state, the variation is as shown in FIG. 87 (a). The effect is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK is increased from 500 to 501.

After that, if the variation display of the second special symbol is lost, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), a variation effect pattern that is not dedicated to the rush effect is determined, and the rush effect in the special time-saving gaming state (here, short). Rush production) is executed. Specifically, the character image "achieved" is displayed together with the effect image (shielded image) having a size that the background image and the like are shielded, and the fourth right-handed image MG4 having a size larger than the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), an infinite mode entry display suggesting that the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is entered is performed. Further, when the display time of the infinite mode rush display elapses and the rush effect of the special time reduction game state ends, the rush effect diagram of the special time reduction game state ends, the infinite mode background image and the second time reduction number (J2). The time-saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 749 times". In addition, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("234"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the countdown mode corresponding to the normal gaming state is performed without executing the rush effect of the special time-saving gaming state. The effect (display of the countdown mode background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when the left effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at "3" after a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 87 (f), the right effect symbol 70a also temporarily stops at "3" to form a reach state. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), the reach effect (reach variation without the inrush effect) is executed.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. 87 (h), the effect symbol 70a is a special outcome common to the small hit and the jackpot. ("333") is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the jackpot ("333") indicating a jackpot, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

If the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit as the first variation display in the special time-saving game state, basically, the effect is as shown in FIGS. 87 (e) to 87 (h). However, the roll that is stopped and displayed as a special symbol TZ is a small hit roll (“3V3”).

Further, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the initial variable display in the special time-saving game state, the effect basically changes as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (i). Will be done.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared and the game shifts to the special time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation effect pattern that is not dedicated to the rush effect is displayed. It has been decided that it is possible to execute a rush effect (short rush effect) in a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special time-saving game state has been reached, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the short rush effect is the variation time of the shortest special symbol variation pattern among the plurality of special symbol variation patterns that may be determined in the variation display of the special symbol the specified number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared. It is set to a shorter time than. Therefore, no matter what kind of special figure fluctuation pattern is determined, the rush effect can be executed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol after the transition to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling lost due to the fact that the player has been hit by haste even though the game has shifted to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol after shifting to the special time-saving game state is a big hit or a small hit, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is not executed, but it is the same as the case of loss. In addition, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state may be executed.

In addition, if the first special symbol variation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state is the variation display of the first special symbol, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is executed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. In the case of, the rush effect of the special time saving game state may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the rush effect of the special time-saving game state during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol after shifting to the special time-saving game state, in the normal game state which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol may be set longer than the normal stop display period, and the rush effect of the special time-saving gaming state may be executed in the stop display period. In this case, instead of setting the effect mode to the infinite mode by the end of the rush effect, the effect mode may be set to the infinite mode by starting the variable display (variable effect) of the next special symbol.

Further, in the countdown mode, it is possible to execute an effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle each other. In this case, a character image such as "Infinite mode entry if the ally character can withstand the attack of the enemy character until the countdown mode entry count becomes 0" may be displayed in the introduction effect of the countdown mode. Then, when shifting to the special time-saving game state, the ally character performs an effect to withstand the attack of the enemy character until the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the final special symbol in the normal game state, and shifts to the special time-saving game state. If not (the jackpot special symbol is stopped and the jackpot game is executed), the ally character cannot withstand the attack of the enemy character and loses (the reach when the jackpot game is executed when not in the countdown mode). It is also possible to perform an effect that is the opposite of the effect that the ally character executed as the effect wins over the enemy character).

(Example of production when the special time saving game state ends)
An example of the effect when the number of time reductions (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time reduction gaming state ends will be described with reference to FIG. 88.

Here, it is assumed that a countdown effect suggesting that the special time-saving game state ends is executed from the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol three times before the end of the special time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the numerical image of "3"-> "2"-> "1" is displayed every time the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the fluctuation time elapses in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol one time before the end of the special time-saving gaming state and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, the effect symbol is displayed. The 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed when the result is lost (“234”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted. In addition, the time saving remaining number image KG displayed at the same position as the normal time saving game state in the same display mode is "1 remaining time", and the number of games GK is the number of fluctuations displayed from before the occurrence of the special time saving game state. It is "1249 times" that took over.

Then, when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol at which the special time saving game state ends is started, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed as shown in FIG. 88 (b). When started, the number in the second hold number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3", and the three hold icon HIs displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are directed toward the icon display area 70C. The shift display is performed and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the time-saving remaining number image KG changes from "remaining 1 time" to "remaining 0 times", the game number GK is increased from 1249 times to 1250 times, and the number "0" indicating the remaining 0 times as a countdown effect. The image is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are lost ("134"). ”) To stop and display. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the normal gaming state is started by the stop display of the lost special symbol, so that the first right-handed image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the predetermined time elapses, the end suggestion effect suggesting that the time-saving game state ends is executed. Specifically, the shutter image SY is closed so as to shield the background image, various icons, and the like.

Then, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started, FIG. 88 (d) As shown in, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in the continuous state where the shutter image SY (shielded image) is displayed, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "3" to "2". do. It should be noted that the game count GK remains hidden during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if the variation effect is executed, the game count is only added internally, and it is visually grasped. It is in a state where it cannot be done.

It should be noted that the period during which the variable display based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period during which the shutter image SY is displayed, is a jackpot notice effect or pre-reading. The production is not executed.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol elapses, as shown in FIG. 88 (e), the special symbol TZ is lost (“326”” in the continuous state where the shutter image SY (shielded image) is displayed. ) To stop and display.

Further, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold storage) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is started, FIG. 88 (f). As shown in, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started in the continuous state where the shutter image SY (shielded image) is displayed, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is reduced from "2" to "1". do.

After that, the fluctuation display and stop of the special symbol TZ in the state where the shutter image SY (shielded image) is displayed until the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0. The display is repeated.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state becomes 0, the shutter is released as shown in FIG. 88 (g). In the continuous state in which the image SY (shielded image) is displayed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a missed result (“559”).

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ elapses, as shown in FIG. 88 (h), the shutter image SY (shielded image) disappears, the effect mode A background image is displayed, and the first hold icon display area is displayed. 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-handed image HG prompting to launch a game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. In addition, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining hold of the first special symbol (first hold storage) is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area is started. The number of 70E is reduced from "1" to "0", and one hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Will be done.

In this way, when the number of time reductions (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time reduction gaming state ends, it is notified that the game is in the normal gaming state (various production images corresponding to the production mode A are displayed. ) Is not executed before the result display is executed. Therefore, the game can be advanced without giving a feeling of loss that the jackpot game and the time-saving game state have been missed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the shutter image SY is displayed from the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation in the time reduction, to the variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. In this state, only the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience a novel effect that does not make the player strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG that prompts the player to launch the game ball on the left side of the game area 5a at the transition to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by preventing the player from firing a useless game ball.

Further, in the special time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining number image KG is displayed at the same position and in the same display mode as the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the game is in a time-saving game state and the number of remaining time-saving games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the period during which the variable display based on the remaining hold (second hold storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period during which the shutter image SY is displayed, is a jackpot notice effect or pre-reading. Instead of setting the effect not to be executed, the execution of the jackpot advance notice effect may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead effect may be restricted, or vice versa. In addition, the execution of a specific notice effect (for example, a winning decision effect, a big hit confirmation effect, etc.) among the jackpot advance notice effects is permitted, and other notice effects (for example, a dialogue notice effect, a roulette notice effect, a cut-in notice effect, etc.) are allowed. ) May be restricted, or the execution of a specific effect among the look-ahead effects (for example, a light emission effect at the time of winning) is permitted, and other effects (for example, a look-ahead zone effect or a look-ahead countdown effect) are allowed. Etc.) may be regulated.

Further, instead of displaying the time-saving remaining number image KG in the same position and the same display mode as the normal time-saving gaming state in the special time-saving gaming state, the time-saving remaining number image is displayed at a position different from the normal time-saving gaming state and / or in a different display mode. KG may be displayed. By doing so, it becomes easy to recognize whether the game is in the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the number of time reductions (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time reduction game state ends, the special time reduction game state does not shift again, so that the special time reduction game state ends. When the power supply that has been stopped later is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the display mode may be such that the number of fluctuations until the game count GK shifts to the special time-saving game state such as "???" is unknown. By doing so, the player can recognize that it is after the end of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of time reductions (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the power supply stopped after the special time reduction game state ends and the game control state is restored, a specific light emitting unit is used. (For example, the top lamp 10b) may be made to emit light in a specific light emitting mode (for example, flashing red at 750 ms) different from the light emitting mode at the time of error (for example, blinking red at a cycle of 250 ms). By doing so, the player can recognize that it is after the end of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the specific light emitting unit (for example, the top lamp 10b) is made to emit light in a specific light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode at the time of error, the blinking in the specific light emitting mode is more than the blinking cycle in the light emitting mode at the time of error. The cycle may be faster or the same.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
In the second embodiment, even if the remaining number of small hits remains due to the stop display of the specific small hit special symbol, the normal time saving game state ends, and the remaining number of small hits set for each big hit game. Is different from the first embodiment in that the above is different from the first embodiment. Therefore, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing a first game state setting table for setting a game state after the end of the big hit game without going through the small hit game, and FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram showing the game via the small hit game. It is a figure which shows the 2nd game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the big hit game.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a), in the first game state setting table, the stop special figure data of the big hit special symbol, the game state information at the time of the big hit winning, and the game state to be set are set. A flag (a time saving flag indicating that the time saving game state is set), a first time saving number (J1) which is the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol for ending the time saving game state, and a second special for ending the time saving game state. The second time reduction number (J2), which is the number of times of variation display of the symbol, and the third time reduction number (J3), which is the total number of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that terminates the time reduction game state. The remaining number of small hits (Z1), which is the number of small hit variation displays that end the time-saving game state, and the third small hit remaining number, which is the number of specific small hit variation displays that end the time-saving game state, are associated with each other. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 89 (b), in the second game state setting table, the stop special figure data of the small hit special symbol and the game state at the time of passing through the specific area showing the game state at the time of passing the specific area 53 of the game ball are displayed. Information, a game status flag to be set (a time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction game state is set), a first time reduction number (J1) which is the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol for ending the time reduction game state, and a time reduction. The second time saving number (J2), which is the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol for ending the game state, and the number of times of change display of the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol for ending the time saving game state. 3 time reduction number (J3), small hit remaining number (Z1) which is the number of small hit variation display to end the time reduction game state, and the third small number of specific small hit variation display to end the time reduction game state. The number of remaining hits is associated with.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 89 is a specific small hit variation (third small hit game) in addition to the remaining number of small hits (Z1), which is the number of small hit variation displays of all types. The third small hit remaining number (Z2), which is the number of times of the variable display) to be executed, is set. By doing so, the player can be interested in the types of small hit fluctuations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 89 is that the remaining number of small hits (Z1) and the remaining number of third small hits (Z2) are set to the same number, and the remaining number of small hits (Z1). ) And the remaining number of times per third small hit (Z2) may be set to different times. By doing so, it is possible to create a case where the time-saving gaming state ends regardless of any type of small hit variation, and a case where the time-saving gaming state ends only with a specific small hit variation. It is possible to improve the interest of.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
A special symbol variation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board 110. Here, only the difference from the special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 27 will be described, and the description of the matching portion will be omitted.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S320-9 whether or not the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S320-13, and if it is a small hit special symbol, until the time-saving gaming state saved in the game RWM area is terminated in step S320-10. The remaining number of small hits (Z1) is subtracted by 1.

In step S320-10A, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small hit special symbol is the third small hit special symbol (special symbol 15). If it is not the third small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S320-11, and if it is the third small hit special symbol, the remaining number of second small hits (Z2) is subtracted by 1 in step S320-10B. do.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining number of small hits (Z1) or the remaining number of third small hits (Z2) has become "0". When the remaining number of small hits (Z1) or the remaining number of small hits (Z2) becomes "0", the process is transferred to step S320-12 to end the time-saving gaming state, and the remaining number of small hits is reduced. If it is not "0", the process is transferred to step S320-13.

In this way, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (the small hit game is executed) during the time-saving game state in which it is easy to win the game ball to the second starting port 47, the number of time reductions (J1, J2, Even when J3) remains, the time-saving gaming state ends when the remaining number of small hits (Z1) or the remaining number of third small hits (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, the player tries to advance the game advantageously by referring to the combination of the look-ahead effect and the effect symbol 70a displayed as a stop (whether or not the player passes the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small hit game and aims at an advantageous big hit. ) However, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the game method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (the small hit game is executed) during the time-saving game state in which it is easy to win the game ball to the second starting port 47, the remaining number of small hits (Z1) remains. Even if this is the case, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of third small hits (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, the player tries to advance the game advantageously by referring to the combination of the look-ahead effect and the effect symbol 70a displayed as a stop (whether or not the player passes the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small hit game and aims at an advantageous big hit. ) However, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the game method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1)
◆ Here, in the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game advantageous to the player, and the result of the determination is determined. A gaming machine that executes a gaming effect is common. Such a gaming machine has a movable body (starting opening opening / closing member, large winning opening opening / closing member, specific area opening / closing member, etc.) operated by a drive source (solenoid or the like) controlled by a main control board. In some cases, the drive source is operated according to the progress of the game to operate the movable body (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-118109). However, in such a gaming machine, the gaming machine 1 (including the case of only the gaming board 5 and only the board unit 500) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the gaming store (only the gaming board 5 and the board unit 500 are replaced). Including), there is a problem that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means are controlled. A movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, which is operated by a drive source (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b). The first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, the specific area opening / closing member 52, and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) are provided, and the main control means starts the progress control of the game after the power supply is started. In the state before the start (during the initial setting process) up to, the drive source can be initially operated (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means are used to control the game. A movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, which is operated by a drive source (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b). 1st prize opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member 52, 2nd major winning opening opening / closing member 57) The game includes a value-imparting means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of giving value (prize ball, prize ball data), and the main control means is used after the power supply is started. The drive source can be initially operated (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined mode in the pre-start state (during the initial setting process) until the progress control of the The granting of the prize value by means is invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means are used to control the game. A movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, which is operated by a drive source (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b). The first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, the specific area opening / closing member 52, and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) are provided, and the main control means satisfies the starting condition (a game ball to the starting opening or the normal gate). The advantageous game (special game, auxiliary game) in which the variable display of the symbol is executed by the display means (special symbol display, normal symbol display) based on the ball entry) and the drive source is operated according to the result of the variable display. ) Is possible, and in the pre-start state (during the initial setting process) from the start of the power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the drive source is initially operated (ON) in a predetermined mode. ⇔ OFF), and in the pre-start state, the execution of the variation display and the execution of the advantageous game are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a drive source (second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b) controlled by the main control means. , 1st prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, 2nd winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) The main control means includes an opening / closing member 52 and a second large winning opening opening / closing member 57), and the main control means includes an initial operation means capable of causing the drive source to perform initial operation (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined mode, and a game. An information display means that can calculate specific information (normal base value) based on actual results (number of normal payouts, normal medium outs) and display the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor). In the pre-start state (during the initial setting process) from the start of the power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the initial operation by the initial operation means is executed, and the initial operation is performed. During execution, the display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means are used to control the game. A movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, which is operated by a drive source (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b). 1st prize opening opening / closing member 51, specific area opening / closing member 52, 2nd prize opening opening / closing member 57) A value-imparting means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of giving value (prize ball, prize ball data) is provided, and the progress control of the game is started after the power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during the initial setting process), the prize value is invalidated by the value-imparting means, and the main control means causes the drive source to perform initial operation (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined mode. Specific information (normal base value) is calculated based on the initial operation means that can be performed and the game record (number of normal payouts, normal medium outs), and the specific information is used as the information display means (performance display monitor). It has an information display means capable of displaying, and the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means in the pre-start state, and the specific information by the information display means is executed during the execution of the initial operation. Display is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means are used to control the game. A movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, which is operated by a drive source (second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b). The first large winning opening opening / closing member 51, the specific area opening / closing member 52, and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57) are provided, and the main control means satisfies the starting condition (a game ball to the starting opening or the normal gate). The variable display means capable of executing the variable display of the symbol by the display means (special symbol display, normal symbol display) based on the ball entry) and the drive source are operated according to the result of the variable display. An advantageous game means capable of executing an advantageous game (small hit game, big hit game), an initial operation means capable of causing the drive source to perform an initial operation (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined mode, and a game record (game results). An information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the number of normal payouts and normal outs and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor). In the state before the start (during the initial setting process) from the start of the power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the initial operation by the initial operation means is executed, and the initial operation is being executed. , The execution of the variation display by the variation display means, the execution of the advantageous game by the advantageous gaming means, and the display of the specific information by the information display means are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game or a specific game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes a special game based on the fact that the gaming medium passes through a specific area provided inside the winning device during the execution of the specific game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-057968 (see). However, such a gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is low.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big hit game) or a specific game (small hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball at the starting port). ), A game state control means that can control a normal game state, and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the above-mentioned. A winning device (large winning opening) that changes the game medium from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which the game medium is easy to win during the execution of the specific game, and a winning device provided inside the winning device during the execution of the specific game. A special game execution means for executing the special game based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area (specific area 53) is provided, and the game medium passes through the specific area during the execution of the specific game. It is possible to perform predetermined processing (processing for setting game conditions after a big hit game, etc.) based on the game state at that time. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting port). The determination means includes a determination means, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the determination means is the first. 1 A first determination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (winning a prize at the first start opening), and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (winning a prize at the second start opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, a first big hit game and a third big hit game) and a second special game (for example, a second) that is more advantageous than the first special game. There is a big hit game), and when it is determined by the first determination means that the special game is to be executed, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game can be executed. The state includes a specific gaming state controlled via the special game (normal time-saving gaming state) and a specific gaming state controlled without going through the special game (special time-saving gaming state). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big hit game, small hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting opening). A determination means for determining whether or not the game is present, a game state control means that can control a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and execution of the special game. A winning device (large winning opening) that changes from a state in which the game medium is difficult to win to a state in which the game medium is easy to win, and a specific area provided inside the winning device during the execution of the special game. A game state determining means capable of determining a game state to be controlled thereafter based on the passage of the game medium through (specific area 53) is provided. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game, small hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting opening). The determination means is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the game is present, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. The means are the first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning to the first starting port) and the second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning to the second starting opening). The special game has a determination means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third big hit game) and a second special game (for example, a first big hit game) which is more advantageous than the first special game. , The second big hit game), and the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (big hit) and a second result (small hit) different from the first result, and the first determination means. When it is determined by the first result (big hit), either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game state is the first special game. The first specific game state controlled after the end (normal time reduction game state in which the second time reduction number is set to 7 times: rush battle mode) and the second specific game state controlled after the end of the second special game. (Normal time saving game state in which the second time saving number is set to 55 times: random dance mode, normal time saving game state in which the second time saving number is set to 95 times: random dance mode) is provided. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big hit game, small hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting opening). The determination means is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the game is present, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. The means are a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning to the first start opening) and a second determination that makes a determination based on the establishment of the start condition (winning to the second start opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, a third big hit game) and a second special game (for example, a second V big hit game) which is more advantageous than the first special game. And a third special game (for example, a fourth big hit game and a fifth big hit game) that are more advantageous than the second special game, and the determination result of the determination means includes the first result (big hit). , There is a second result (small hit) different from the first result, and when the first determination means determines the first result (big hit), the first special game and the second When any of the special games can be executed and the second result (small hit) is determined by the second determination means, the second special game can be executed by the second determination means. When the first result (big hit) is determined, the third special game can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big hit game, small hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting opening). The determination means is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the game is present, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. The means are a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning to the first starting opening) and a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning to the second starting opening). The special game has two determination means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third big hit game) and a second special game (for example, a second V big hit) which is more advantageous than the first special game. There are a third special game (for example, a fourth big hit game and a fifth big hit game) which is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment result of the determination means is the first result (big hit). ) And a second result (small hit) different from the first result, and in the specific gaming state (random dance mode, super random dance mode) controlled after the second special game is executed, the said When the first result (big hit) is determined by the second determination means, the third special game can be executed, and when the second determination means determines the second result (small hit). In addition, the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big hit game, small hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting opening). The determination means is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the game is present, and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. The means are a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning to the first start opening) and a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning to the second start opening). The special game has two determination means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third big hit game) and a second special game (for example, a second V big hit) which is more advantageous than the first special game. There are a third special game (for example, a fourth big hit game and a fifth big hit game) which is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment result of the determination means is the first result (big hit). ) And a second result (small hit) different from the first result, and in the specific game state (infinite mode) controlled after the third special game is executed, the second determination means. The third special game can be executed when the first result (big hit) is determined by the second determination means, and the second result (small hit) is determined by the second determination means. 2 special games can be performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the eighth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big hit game, small hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting opening). A determination means for determining whether or not the game is present, a variation display execution means for executing a variation display of a symbol based on the determination of the determination means, a normal game state, and a specific game state (time saving game) which is more advantageous than the normal game state. A game state control means that can be controlled to a state (state, ST state), a first effect mode (effect modes A to C), and a second effect mode (countdown mode) different from the first effect mode. The determination means includes a controllable effect control means, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning to the first start opening) and the establishment of the second start condition (first). It has a second determination means for making a determination based on (winning a prize at the starting port), and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third big hit game) and a first special game. There is an advantageous second special game (for example, a first big hit game, a third big hit game, a fourth big hit game, a fifth big hit game), and the game state control means has a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game. It is possible to control the specific gaming state until the variation display is executed, and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (normal time saving gaming state) controlled via the special game. There is a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the effect control means is before a predetermined number of times (50 times) controlled by the second specific gaming state. When the variation display is executed, the control is performed from the first effect mode (any of the effect modes A to C) to the second effect mode (countdown mode). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second. The variable display of the special symbol may be executed in the order of winning the game balls to the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed not to generate a probabilistic gaming state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, but the probabilistic gaming state may be changed depending on the type of the jackpot special symbol. It may be generated, and in this case, in a specific round game during the jackpot game (for example, a second round game or a final round game), a specific area 53 provided inside the first big winning opening 50 is provided. The process of generating the probabilistic gaming state may be performed on the condition that the gaming ball has passed, or the variable display that becomes the probabilistic gaming state based on the gaming state when the gaming ball passes through the specific area 53. A process of determining the number of times may be performed.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the game using the medal (game medium) (giving condition is satisfied), a predetermined amount is obtained. It can also be used for a rotating body type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) capable of giving a prize medal (prize medal data) to a player. Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 General gate 45 1st starting port 47 2nd starting port 50 1st big winning opening 56 2nd big winning opening 70 1st image display device 71 2nd image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and
A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous than the normal game state is provided.
The determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first start condition and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the second start condition.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game.
When it is determined by the first determination means that the special game is to be executed, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed.
In the specific gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a specific gaming state controlled via the special game and a specific gaming state controlled without going through the special game.

Images